Presto User Manual

y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
v
E
l
a
Precast & Prestressed

Concrete Beam Analysis
and Design
LEAP Software, Inc.
P.O. Box 16827
Tampa, Florida 33687
www.leapsoft.com
(800) 451-5327 toll-free
(813) 985-9170 phone
(813) 980-3642 fax
PRESTO LEAP Software, Inc.

Copyright 1980-2005 LEAP Software, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
This software program has been developed for use by professional engineers. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that the input for the software program is complete and correct, and that
the results provided by the software program are interpreted correctly and conform to any design
codes and government regulations that may apply.
y
p
o
Although this program has been written and tested by LEAP Software, Inc., no warranty,
expressed or implied, is made as to the accuracy or functioning of the program or related program material. In no event will LEAP Software be liable for any damages for lost data or profits
arising out of the use of or inability to use the licensed program.
The PRESTO software is Copyright LEAP Software, Inc., 1993-2005. All rights reserved.
PRESTO is licensed to the original licensee for use only on the terms set forth in the License
and Confidentiality Agreement.
n
o
PRESTO
The
user manual is Copyright LEAP Software, Inc., 1993-2005 All rights reserved.
Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this manual, or any portion of
it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
i
t
Trademarks
PRESTO and the PRESTO logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and
are registered trademarks of LEAP Software, Inc., 1993-2005. All rights reserved. LEAP and
LEAP Software are registered trademarks of LEAP Software, Inc.
a
u
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and the Microsoft logo are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
l
a
Tekla Structures is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation.
v
E
Version:
PRESTO v8.6
Published by:
LEAP Software, Inc.

Tampa, Florida
Updated August 2005
Editor:
Pauline OBrien
Contributing Authors:
Sri Kanneganti (Product Manager)

Abdul Rauf, P.E.
Tan Warraich
T A B L E OF C O N T E N T S
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................IN-1
USING THE MANUAL ........................................................................................................................................................IN-1
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS...............................................................................................................................IN-2
PROGRAM CAPABILITIES ..................................................................................................................................................IN-3
DESIGN CODES .......................................................................................................................................................IN-3
MEMBER GEOMETRY ...............................................................................................................................................IN-3
LOAD TYPES ...........................................................................................................................................................IN-3
NON-PRESTRESSED REINFORCEMENT .....................................................................................................................IN-3
STRAND PATTERN OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................................IN-3
SECTION TYPES ......................................................................................................................................................IN-4
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN FEATURES ...........................................................................................................................IN-4
MISCELLANEOUS .....................................................................................................................................................IN-4
UNITS .............................................................................................................................................................................IN-5
PROGRAM INTERFACE .....................................................................................................................................................IN-5
USING ONLINE HELP .......................................................................................................................................................IN-6
USER MANUAL ................................................................................................................................................................IN-6
y
p
o
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................. GS-1

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................... GS-1
LEAP SOFTWARE SECURITY ......................................................................................................................................... GS-1
TYPES OF LICENSES...................................................................................................................................................... GS-1
NETWORK SETUP .......................................................................................................................................................... GS-2
AUTHORIZATION WARNINGS........................................................................................................................................... GS-2
INSTALLING THE PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................ GS-3
NOVELL INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................................... GS-6
INSTALLING AND CONFIGURING MICROSOFT .NET FRAMEWORK ..................................................................................... GS-7
MANAGING PRODUCT SITE KEYS ................................................................................................................................... GS-8
Authorizing a Program .................................................................................................................................... GS-8
Demo Authorization....................................................................................................................................... GS-10
Transferring Authorization............................................................................................................................. GS-11
n
o
i
t
a
u
MULTIPLE FILE COPIES ............................................................................................................................................... GS-14

PROGRAM CRASH/TEMPORARY LOSS OF LICENSE........................................................................................................ GS-14
INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS TO WORK FROM WITHIN TEKLA STRUCTURES.............................................................. GS-14
CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT ............................................................................................................................. GS-15
l
a
CHAPTER 3 GENERAL OPERATION ...........................................................................................GO-1

STARTING PRESTO .....................................................................................................................................................GO-1
PRESTO TAB SCREENS ...............................................................................................................................................GO-1
PROJECT TAB ...............................................................................................................................................................GO-2
SWITCH DESIGN CODE DIALOG BOX ..............................................................................................................................GO-2
MEMBER INFO TAB ........................................................................................................................................................GO-3
Member Info Screen Terms ............................................................................................................................GO-3
v
E
OPENING DATA DIALOG BOX .........................................................................................................................................GO-6

Opening Data Screen Terms ..........................................................................................................................GO-6
TORSION PARAMETERS DIALOG BOX .............................................................................................................................GO-7
Torsion Parameter Screen Terms...................................................................................................................GO-7
MATERIALS TAB ............................................................................................................................................................GO-8

Materials Screen Terms ..................................................................................................................................GO-8
LOADS TAB .................................................................................................................................................................GO-11
Loads Screen Terms.....................................................................................................................................GO-11
PRESTOv8.6
Table of Contents / i
LEAP Software, Inc. No part of this user manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means without the written permission of the publisher.
ANALYSIS TAB.............................................................................................................................................................GO-12
LOAD FACTORS DIALOG BOX .......................................................................................................................................GO-13
CHECK POINTS DIALOG BOX .......................................................................................................................................GO-15
DESIGN TAB................................................................................................................................................................GO-16
DESIGN PARAMETERS DIALOG BOX .............................................................................................................................GO-17
DESIGN OPTIONS TAB .........................................................................................................................................GO-17
Design Options Screen Terms ......................................................................................................................GO-18
PRESTRESS AND LOSSES TAB .............................................................................................................................GO-20
Prestress and Losses Screen Terms ............................................................................................................GO-21
DEFLECTION MULTIPLIER TAB ..............................................................................................................................GO-22
PHI FACTORS TAB ...............................................................................................................................................GO-23
MISCELLANEOUS DATA TAB .................................................................................................................................GO-23
Miscellaneous Data Screen Terms ...............................................................................................................GO-24
ALLOWABLE STRESS TAB ....................................................................................................................................GO-25
BEARING STEEL INFO DIALOG BOX ..............................................................................................................................GO-26
......................................................................................................................................................................GO-26
Bearing Steel Info Screen Terms ..................................................................................................................GO-27
y
p
o
USER-DEFINED EFFECTIVE WIDTH OF TOPPING DIALOG BOX .......................................................................................GO-27

STRESS FACTORS DIALOG BOX ...................................................................................................................................GO-28
STRAND AND REBAR PATTERN DIALOG BOX ................................................................................................................GO-29
STRAND TAB .......................................................................................................................................................GO-30
Strand Tab Screen Terms.............................................................................................................................GO-34
LONGITUDINAL BARS TAB ....................................................................................................................................GO-39
Longitudinal Bars Screen Terms...................................................................................................................GO-40
OPTIONS TO SAVE, LOAD AND SAVE AS ...............................................................................................................GO-42
STEM STIRRUPS TAB ...........................................................................................................................................GO-43
Stem Stirrups Tab Screen Terms..................................................................................................................GO-44
STEM MESH TAB .................................................................................................................................................GO-45
Stem Mesh Tab Screen Terms .....................................................................................................................GO-45
n
o
i
t
a
u
DESIGN RESULTS SCREEN ..........................................................................................................................................GO-46

DRAWING PRINT DIALOG BOX......................................................................................................................................GO-47
USING PRESTO FROM WITHIN TEKLA STRUCTURES....................................................................................................GO-48
PROGRAM MENU COMMANDS ......................................................................................................................................GO-54
FILE MENU..................................................................................................................................................................GO-54
FILE | NEW..........................................................................................................................................................GO-54
FILE | OPEN ........................................................................................................................................................GO-54
FILE | SAVE.........................................................................................................................................................GO-55
FILE | SAVE AS ...................................................................................................................................................GO-55
FILE MENU..................................................................................................................................................................GO-55
FILE | SAVE SETTING ...........................................................................................................................................GO-55
FILE | PRINT ........................................................................................................................................................GO-56
FILE | PRINT SETUP.............................................................................................................................................GO-57
FILE | SECURITY ..................................................................................................................................................GO-58
FILE | EXIT ..........................................................................................................................................................GO-58
SHOW MENU...............................................................................................................................................................GO-59
SHOW | IMAGE ...................................................................................................................................................GO-59
Image Button Summaries..............................................................................................................................GO-59
SHOW | MODEL ..................................................................................................................................................GO-60
SHOW | RESULTS ...............................................................................................................................................GO-60
SHOW | DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................................................................GO-61
SHOW | PREFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................GO-62
l
a
v
E
ii / Table of Contents
PRESTOv8.6
LIBRARIES MENU.........................................................................................................................................................GO-62
LIBRARIES | SETUP ..............................................................................................................................................GO-63
LIBRARIES | BEAM SECTIONS ...............................................................................................................................GO-63
Drawing the Beam Section............................................................................................................................GO-65
LIBRARIES | PRESTRESSING ................................................................................................................................GO-69
LIBRARIES | REBAR .............................................................................................................................................GO-70
LIBRARIES | CONVERT FROM V. 7.........................................................................................................................GO-71
HELP MENU ................................................................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | USER MANUAL ........................................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | SEARCH FOR HELP ON ............................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | HOW TO USE HELP .................................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | VISIT LEAP WEB SITE ............................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | ABOUT PRESTO ....................................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | TECH SUPPORT ......................................................................................................................................GO-72
HELP | CHECK FOR UPDATES .............................................................................................................................GO-72
y
p
o
CHAPTER 4 TUTORIAL SESSION ................................................................................................... T-1
TUTORIAL SESSION DESIGN OF A 8DT24 DOUBLE TEE ............................................................ T-3

PROBLEM DATA ............................................................................................................................................................... T-4
CONCRETE .............................................................................................................................................................. T-4
TOPPING .................................................................................................................................................................. T-4
THICKNESS .............................................................................................................................................................. T-5
STRAND ................................................................................................................................................................... T-5
OPENING DATA ........................................................................................................................................................ T-5
LOADS ..................................................................................................................................................................... T-5
STEP 1: START OF TUTORIAL ........................................................................................................................................... T-5
STEP 2: COMPLETE THE PROJECT INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... T-6
STEP 3: DEFINE THE MEMBER INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................... T-6
BEAM SECTIONS LIBRARY......................................................................................................................................... T-7
SECTION DETAIL DIALOG BOX .................................................................................................................................. T-7
TEMPLATE DIALOG BOX............................................................................................................................................ T-8
BEAM SECTIONS LIBRARY......................................................................................................................................... T-8
MEMBER INFO TAB ................................................................................................................................................... T-8
OPENING DATA DIALOG BOX .................................................................................................................................... T-9
IMAGE SCREEN ...................................................................................................................................................... T-10
STEP 4: DEFINE THE MATERIAL PROPERTIES .................................................................................................................. T-11
STEP 5: DEFINE THE LOADS ........................................................................................................................................... T-11
STEP 6: RUN THE ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................................... T-12
LOAD FACTORS DIALOG BOX .................................................................................................................................. T-12
CHECK POINTS DIALOG BOX .................................................................................................................................. T-12
ANALYSIS TAB........................................................................................................................................................ T-13
STEP 7: DESIGN THE BEAM ............................................................................................................................................ T-14
DESIGN PARAMETERS DIALOG BOX ........................................................................................................................ T-14
STRAND AND REBAR PATTERN DIALOG BOX ........................................................................................................... T-15
STRAND TAB SCREEN ............................................................................................................................................ T-16
DESIGN RESULTS SCREEN ..................................................................................................................................... T-16
DIAGRAM SCREEN .................................................................................................................................................. T-17
STEP 9: GENERATE THE PROGRAM OUTPUT ................................................................................................................... T-18
OUTPUT ................................................................................................................................................................. T-19
OUTPUT T-19
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
CHAPTER 5 THEORY ................................................................................................................... TH-1
PRESTOv8.6
Table of Contents / iii
GENERAL OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................................................... TH-1

LAYOUT ........................................................................................................................................................................ TH-2
TOPPING ....................................................................................................................................................................... TH-2
SECTION PROPERTIES ................................................................................................................................................... TH-4
PRESTRESS LOSSES ..................................................................................................................................................... TH-5
ANALYSIS...................................................................................................................................................................... TH-6
LOADS .......................................................................................................................................................................... TH-7
STRESSES ACI 318-99 .............................................................................................................................................. TH-8
STRESSES ACI 318-05 .............................................................................................................................................. TH-8
STRESSES CSA 23.3-94.......................................................................................................................................... TH-10
CRACK CONTROL ACI 318-99/05............................................................................................................................. TH-10
CRACK CONTROL CSA 23.3-94 AND ACI 318-95 ..................................................................................................... TH-11
ULTIMATE STRENGTH ACI 318-99/05 ...................................................................................................................... TH-11
ULTIMATE STRENGTH CSA 23.3-94 ......................................................................................................................... TH-12
PRESTRESSING STRAND STRESS-STRAIN CURVES .................................................................................................... TH-14
DESIGN METHODOLOGY ACI 318-99 ........................................................................................................................ TH-16
DESIGN METHODOLOGY ACI 318-05 ........................................................................................................................ TH-18
SHEAR ACI 318-99/05............................................................................................................................................. TH-19
TORSION ACI 318-99/05 ......................................................................................................................................... TH-20
SHEAR AND TORSION - PCI DESIGN HANDBOOK, 6TH EDITION ..................................................................................... TH-21
SHEAR AND TORSION CSA 23.3-94 ......................................................................................................................... TH-21
CAMBER AND DEFLECTIONS......................................................................................................................................... TH-22
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH ............................................................................................................................................... TH-25
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE ............................................................................................................................................ TH-26
REDUCTION FACTORS ................................................................................................................................................. TH-26
BEARING ANALYSIS ..................................................................................................................................................... TH-27
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
CHAPTER 1 NOMENCLATURE AND PRINTOUT EXPLANATION .............................................. A1-1

LABELS USED THROUGHOUT THE PRINTOUT ...................................................................................................................A1-1
PROJECT DATA ..............................................................................................................................................................A1-2
TOPPING DATA...............................................................................................................................................................A1-3
PRESTRESSED STRAND DATA .........................................................................................................................................A1-3
PRESTRESSED STRAND PATTERN DATA ..........................................................................................................................A1-3
STRAND GROUPS, SHIELDING AND PULL DATA ................................................................................................................A1-3
REBAR DATA .................................................................................................................................................................A1-3
REBAR PATTERN DATA...................................................................................................................................................A1-3
STIRRUPS ......................................................................................................................................................................A1-3
BEARING STEEL DATA ....................................................................................................................................................A1-4
CALCULATED INTERNAL CONSTANTS ...............................................................................................................................A1-4
STEM MESH DATA..........................................................................................................................................................A1-4
UNREINFORCED SECTION PROPERTY ZONE DATA ...........................................................................................................A1-4
THIS SECTION PRINTS ONLY IN ACI 318-05 MODE .........................................................................................................A1-4
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS ..................................................................................................................................................A1-5
PRESTRESS LOSS COMPUTATIONS .................................................................................................................................A1-5
BEARING STEEL .............................................................................................................................................................A1-6
RELEASE AND FINAL STRESSES ......................................................................................................................................A1-6
ULTIMATE STRENGTH .....................................................................................................................................................A1-6
l
a
v
E
iv / Table of Contents
PRESTOv8.6
CRACK CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................................... A1-7

CRACKING LOAD ............................................................................................................................................................ A1-7
VERTICAL SHEAR AND TORSION ..................................................................................................................................... A1-7
HORIZONTAL SHEAR....................................................................................................................................................... A1-8
CAMBER AND DEFLECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................... A1-9
y
p
o
CHAPTER 2 HAND CALCULATIONS FOR SELECTED ITEMS....................................................A2-1

MEMBER SECTION - PRECAST ................................................................................................................................ A2-1
Section Properties............................................................................................................................................ A2-1
HAND CALCULATIONS FOR SELECTED ITEMS ................................................................................................................... A2-1
Zone 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. A2-2
Zone 4 .............................................................................................................................................................. A2-2
MEMBER SECTION - COMPOSITE ............................................................................................................................. A2-3
Zones 1, 3 and 5 .............................................................................................................................................. A2-3
Zones 2 and 4 .................................................................................................................................................. A2-3
PRECAST DATA ...................................................................................................................................................... A2-3
Allowable Concrete Stresses ........................................................................................................................... A2-4
Release ............................................................................................................................................................ A2-4
Final Conditions ............................................................................................................................................... A2-4
CONCRETE DATA ................................................................................................................................................... A2-5
PRESTRESSED STRAND .......................................................................................................................................... A2-5
UNREINFORCED SECTION PROPERTIES ................................................................................................................... A2-6
REINFORCED SECTION PROPERTY DATA ................................................................................................................. A2-6
Analysis............................................................................................................................................................ A2-6
Self-weight ....................................................................................................................................................... A2-7
Topping ............................................................................................................................................................ A2-7
Superimposed Dead Load on Composite (SD)................................................................................................ A2-8
Live Loads (LL) ................................................................................................................................................ A2-8
Total Moment and Shears At Final Conditions................................................................................................. A2-8
PRESTRESS LOSSES .............................................................................................................................................. A2-9
PRECAST AND COMPOSITE SECTION PROPERTIES ................................................................................................. A2-11
Miscellaneous Section Properties Computations........................................................................................... A2-11
CALCULATION OF MEMBER STRESSES .................................................................................................................. A2-12
Release Stresses: Precast Section Only ....................................................................................................... A2-12
Final Stresses: Precast Section Only............................................................................................................. A2-13
STRAND DEVELOPMENT........................................................................................................................................ A2-15
ULTIMATE STRENGTH ........................................................................................................................................... A2-15
CRACKING LOAD .................................................................................................................................................. A2-17
VERTICAL SHEAR ................................................................................................................................................. A2-17
HORIZONTAL SHEAR ............................................................................................................................................. A2-20
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
CHAPTER 3 HAND CALCULATIONS FOR TORSION ..................................................................A3-1

HAND CALCULATIONS FOR TORSION ............................................................................................................................... A3-1
MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................................................ A3-2
LOADS ................................................................................................................................................................... A3-2
CRITICAL SECTION ................................................................................................................................................. A3-2
ANALYSIS RESULTS ................................................................................................................................................ A3-2
PRESTRESSING ...................................................................................................................................................... A3-3
COMPOSITE SECTION PROPERTIES ......................................................................................................................... A3-3
STRESSES ............................................................................................................................................................. A3-4
CRACKING MOMENT ............................................................................................................................................... A3-4
SHEAR DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................................... A3-4
PRESTOv8.6
Table of Contents / v
TORSION DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................................A3-5

Cracking Torsional Moment .............................................................................................................................A3-6
Check for Minimum Transverse Steel ..............................................................................................................A3-7
CHECK FOR SPACING .............................................................................................................................................A3-7
Spacing for Shear ............................................................................................................................................A3-7
Spacing for Torsion ..........................................................................................................................................A3-7
LONGITUDINAL STEEL .............................................................................................................................................A3-7
Compression in Concrete.................................................................................................................................A3-8
y
p
o
CHAPTER 4 STRAND AND REBAR PROPERTIES ...................................................................... A4-1

STRAND AND REBAR PROPERTIES ..................................................................................................................................A4-1
CHAPTER 5 SECTION TYPE AND DIMENSIONS......................................................................... A5-1
SECTION TYPE AND DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................................................................A5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................... A6-1
REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................................................A6-1
CHAPTER 7 GLOSSARY................................................................................................................ A7-1

GLOSSARY .....................................................................................................................................................................A7-1
n
o
INDEX ........................................................................................................................................INDEX-1
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
vi / Table of Contents
PRESTOv8.6
L I S T OF F I G U R E S
FIGURE IN-1.
FIGURE GS-1.
FIGURE GS-2.
FIGURE GS-3.
FIGURE GS-4.
FIGURE GS-5.
FIGURE GS-6.
FIGURE GS-7.
FIGURE GS-8.
FIGURE GS-9.
FIGURE GS-10.
FIGURE GS-11.
FIGURE GS-12.
FIGURE GS-13.
PRESTO Online Help Screen ...................................................................................................................IN-6

Welcome Screen..................................................................................................................................... GS-3
Choose Destination Location .................................................................................................................. GS-4
Security Directory.................................................................................................................................... GS-4
Using PRESTO From Within Tekla Structures Option............................................................................. GS-5
Ready to Install the Program................................................................................................................... GS-5
Authorize Now? Dialog............................................................................................................................ GS-6
Installation Complete.............................................................................................................................. GS-6
.Net Framework v1.1 Wizard................................................................................................................... GS-7
Security Adjustment Wizard .................................................................................................................... GS-8
LEAP Software Security Screen ............................................................................................................. GS-9
Client Licenses Screen ........................................................................................................................... GS-9
Created Site Key Screen....................................................................................................................... GS-10
Security Window Authorization Tab....................................................................................................... GS-10
y
p
o
LEAP Software Security Screen Direct Transfer Tab....................................GS-11

FIGURE GS-15. LEAP Software Security Screen Register Transfer Tab ........................................................ GS-12
FIGURE GS-14.
n
o
FIGURE GO-1. PRESTO Splash Screen .........................................................................................................................GO-1

FIGURE GO-2. Project Tab ..............................................................................................................................................GO-2
FIGURE GO-3. Switch Design Code Dialog Box .............................................................................................................GO-3
FIGURE GO-4. Member Info Tab .....................................................................................................................................GO-3
FIGURE GO-5. Gap Topping Adjustment.........................................................................................................................GO-5
FIGURE GO-6. Opening Data Dialog Box........................................................................................................................GO-6
FIGURE GO-7. Torsion Parameters Dialog Box...............................................................................................................GO-7
FIGURE GO-8. Materials Tab...........................................................................................................................................GO-8
FIGURE GO-9. Loads Tab.............................................................................................................................................. GO-11
FIGURE GO-10. Analysis Tab ..........................................................................................................................................GO-13
FIGURE GO-11. Load Factors Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................GO-14
FIGURE GO-12. Check Points Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................GO-15
FIGURE GO-13. Auto Generate Check Points Dialog Box ..............................................................................................GO-16
FIGURE GO-14. Design Tab ............................................................................................................................................GO-17
FIGURE GO-15. Design Options Tab in ACI 318-05 Mode..............................................................................................GO-18
FIGURE GO-16. Design Options Tab in CSA 23.3-94 Mode .........................................................................................GO-18
FIGURE GO-17. Bearing Analysis ...................................................................................................................................GO-19
FIGURE GO-18. Prestress and Losses Tab.....................................................................................................................GO-21
FIGURE GO-19. Deflection Multiplier Tab ........................................................................................................................GO-22
FIGURE GO-20. Phi Factors Tab .....................................................................................................................................GO-23
FIGURE GO-21. Miscellaneous Data Tab ........................................................................................................................GO-24
FIGURE GO-22. Allowable Stress Tab (ACI 318-99 and CSA 23.3-94) ........................................................................GO-25
FIGURE GO-23. Allowable Stress Tab (ACI 318-05) .......................................................................................................GO-26
FIGURE GO-24. Bearing Steel Info Dialog Box ...............................................................................................................GO-26
FIGURE GO-25. User Defined Effective Width of Topping Dialog Box ............................................................................GO-28
FIGURE GO-26. Stress Factors Dialog Box (ACI 318-99) ...............................................................................................GO-28
FIGURE GO-27. Stress Factors Dialog Box (ACI 318-05) ...............................................................................................GO-29
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
List of Figures / 1
FIGURE GO-28. Stress Factors Dialog Box (CSA 23.3-94)...........................................................................................GO-29

FIGURE GO-29. Strand Tab Showing Live Graphics .......................................................................................................GO-30
FIGURE GO-30. Strand Tab Showing Template Definitions.............................................................................................GO-31
FIGURE GO-31. Strand Tab for Double Tee Showing Live Graphics...............................................................................GO-32
FIGURE GO-32. Strand Tab for Double Tee Showing Template Definitions ....................................................................GO-32
FIGURE GO-33. Strand and Rebar Screen Grid Menu....................................................................................................GO-34
FIGURE GO-34. One Point ..............................................................................................................................................GO-35
FIGURE GO-35. One Point Fixed.....................................................................................................................................GO-35
FIGURE GO-36. Two Point Variable.................................................................................................................................GO-36
FIGURE GO-37. Zero Point (Straight) ..............................................................................................................................GO-36
FIGURE GO-38. Left and Right Debond ..........................................................................................................................GO-37
FIGURE GO-39. Mid Debond ...........................................................................................................................................GO-38
FIGURE GO-40. Longitudinal Bars (For Sections Other Than Double Tee).....................................................................GO-39
FIGURE GO-41. Longitudinal Bars (For Double Tee Sections)........................................................................................GO-40
FIGURE GO-42. Two Point Variable Display....................................................................................................................GO-41
FIGURE GO-43. Save Components dialog ......................................................................................................................GO-42
FIGURE GO-44. Stem Stirrups (Shear Reinforcement) ...................................................................................................GO-43
FIGURE GO-45. Design Stirrups Form ............................................................................................................................GO-44
FIGURE GO-46. Stem Mesh Tab .....................................................................................................................................GO-45
FIGURE GO-47. Design Results Screen..........................................................................................................................GO-46
FIGURE GO-48. Enhanced Report View..........................................................................................................................GO-47
FIGURE GO-49. Drawing Print Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................GO-47
FIGURE GO-50. Sample Output Showing C/S.................................................................................................................GO-48
FIGURE GO-51. Tekla Structures with Beam Plug-in Icons .............................................................................................GO-49
FIGURE GO-52. Tekla Structures with PRESTO Plug-in Icon .........................................................................................GO-50
FIGURE GO-53. Member Info Tab when PRESTO is Called from Tekla Structures ........................................................GO-50
FIGURE GO-54. Double Tee Beam Information Passed from Tekla Structures...............................................................GO-51
FIGURE GO-55. Section Details for the Section Passed from Tekla Structures ..............................................................GO-52
FIGURE GO-56. Strand and Rebar Tab for Double Tee Section......................................................................................GO-53
FIGURE GO-57. Update Strand/Rebar Pattern for Beam in Tekla Structures..................................................................GO-53
FIGURE GO-58. File | New ..............................................................................................................................................GO-54
FIGURE GO-59. File | Open.............................................................................................................................................GO-54
FIGURE GO-60. File | Save As ........................................................................................................................................GO-55
FIGURE GO-61. File | Print ..............................................................................................................................................GO-56
FIGURE GO-62. File | Print Setup....................................................................................................................................GO-57
FIGURE GO-63. File | Security.........................................................................................................................................GO-58
FIGURE GO-64. Show | Image ........................................................................................................................................GO-59
FIGURE GO-65. Show | Model.........................................................................................................................................GO-60
FIGURE GO-66. Show | Results ......................................................................................................................................GO-61
FIGURE GO-67. Show | Diagram.....................................................................................................................................GO-61
FIGURE GO-68. Show | Preferences ...............................................................................................................................GO-62
FIGURE GO-69. Libraries | Setup ....................................................................................................................................GO-63
FIGURE GO-70. Libraries | Beam Sections .....................................................................................................................GO-63
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
2 / List of Figures
PRESTO v8.6
FIGURE GO-71. Section Detail Dialog Box (Double Tee) ................................................................................................GO-64

FIGURE GO-72. Section Drawing Screen........................................................................................................................GO-65
FIGURE GO-73. Drawing Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................................GO-67
FIGURE GO-74. Circular Section Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................GO-68
FIGURE GO-75. Template Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................GO-68
FIGURE GO-76. Template Auto Generation Dialog Box ..................................................................................................GO-69
FIGURE GO-77. Libraries | Prestressing..........................................................................................................................GO-70
FIGURE GO-78. Libraries | Rebar....................................................................................................................................GO-71
FIGURE GO-79. Libraries | Convert from v.7 ...................................................................................................................GO-71
FIGURE T-1.
Strand Pattern ............................................................................................................................................ T-4
FIGURE T-2.
PRESTO Splash Screen ............................................................................................................................ T-5
FIGURE T-3.
Project Tab ................................................................................................................................................. T-6
FIGURE T-4.
Member Info Tab ........................................................................................................................................ T-6
FIGURE T-5.
Beam Sections Library ............................................................................................................................... T-7
FIGURE T-6.
Section Detail Dialog Box (Double Tee) ..................................................................................................... T-7
FIGURE T-7.
Template Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................. T-8
FIGURE T-8.
Beam Sections Library (Showing New Section 8DT24)............................................................................. T-8
FIGURE T-9.
Member Info Tab ........................................................................................................................................ T-9
FIGURE T-10. Opening Data Dialog Box........................................................................................................................... T-9
FIGURE T-11. Show | Image ........................................................................................................................................... T-10
FIGURE T-12. Materials Tab.............................................................................................................................................T-11
FIGURE T-13. Loads Tab..................................................................................................................................................T-11
FIGURE T-14. Load Factors Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................... T-12
FIGURE T-15. Check Points Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................... T-13
FIGURE T-16. Analysis Tab ............................................................................................................................................. T-13
FIGURE T-17. Design Tab ............................................................................................................................................... T-14
FIGURE T-18. Design Parameters Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ T-15
FIGURE T-19. Strand and Rebar Pattern (with Template Definitions) Dialog Box.......................................................... T-15
FIGURE T-20. Strand Tab................................................................................................................................................ T-16
FIGURE T-21. Design Results Screen............................................................................................................................. T-17
FIGURE T-22. Diagram Screen ....................................................................................................................................... T-17
FIGURE TH-1. User Specified Left/Right Boundary Distances ........................................................................................TH-3
FIGURE TH-2. Stress-Strain Curves per PCI Design Handbook 5th Edition .................................................................TH-14
FIGURE TH-3. Stress-Strain Cures for Prestressing Strand ..........................................................................................TH-14
FIGURE TH-4. PRESTO 8.2 and Older Methodology ....................................................................................................TH-15
FIGURE TH-5. Stress-Strain Cures for Prestressing Strand Elasticity...........................................................................TH-15
FIGURE TH-6. Variation of f with c/dt .............................................................................................................................TH-19
FIGURE TH-7. Development Curve of Prestressed Strands..........................................................................................TH-26
FIGURE A2-1. Precast Section ........................................................................................................................................ A2-1
FIGURE A2-2. Composite Section ................................................................................................................................... A2-3
FIGURE A2-3. Strand Profile ........................................................................................................................................... A2-5
FIGURE A2-4. Beam Loading .......................................................................................................................................... A2-6
FIGURE A2-5. Strain Diagram for Ultimate Strength ..................................................................................................... A2-15
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTORv8.6
List of Figures / 3
FIGURE A3-1.
FIGURE A3-2.
FIGURE A3-3.
Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam on 30 Ft. Span .........................................................................A3-1

Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam..................................................................................................A3-2
Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam (Closed Stirrup) .......................................................................A3-6
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
4 / List of Figures
PRESTO v8.6
CHAPTER ONE
Introduction
y
p
o
PRESTO is a comprehensive computer program for the design and analysis of
precast, prestressed concrete beams in accordance with ACI specifications.

Version 8.6 provides features to design a beam based on either ACI 318-99 or
ACI 318-05, or CSA 23.3-94 with updates of 2001. It is designed to be as userfriendly as possible so that professional engineers with minimal computer
experience may operate it with ease.
n
o
i
t
Using the Manual
The intent of the PRESTO user manual is to help you become familiar with
the program and its capabilities. We recommend first reading the General
Operation chapter to get an overview of the programs intended functionality
and operational procedures. Review the Theory chapter for an in-depth
description of the programs technical material. The nomenclature in the
Appendix describes the definitions of terms used in PRESTO.
a
u
l
a
v
E
Table of Contents The Table of Contents lists the overall layout and topics of the
PRESTO user manual. It is advised when trying to find a

particular topic in the manual, to scan through the Table of
Contents.
Introduction
This chapter contains information that is helpful to know before
attempting to use PRESTO, such as program capabilities,
intended use, and key features. It also includes helpful
information about using the manual. Reviewing this material
prior to running the program helps to ensure smooth operation.
Getting Started
This chapter contains information relating to program
installation, authorization, and network setup. It also includes
how to transfer authorization and how to contact technical
support. You should read this chapter completely before
installing and running the program.
General Operation The General Operation chapter includes information about
each of the different input fields, main tabs, and screens in
PRESTO. You can also find related information in the online
help system. You can activate the context-sensitive online help
at any time while running the program by pressing the F1 key
on your keyboard.
PRESTOv8.6
IN-1
Using the Manual
The best way to become acquainted with the program is by

actually using it to solve a few problems. In the Tutorials
chapter, we walk you through a typical problem from start to
finish and illustrate how PRESTO operates. We encourage
you to run the tutorial on your own computer and compare
monitor displays with the illustrations in this manual. By
closely following these tutorials, you can quickly become
familiar with a typical design situation and most of the
computer data input/output process.
Tutorials
y
p
o
Theory
Appendices
n
o
i
t
Index
a
u
Typographical Conventions
We have tried to make PRESTO as user-friendly as possible;

however, there are some features that cannot be made apparent
by a headlong approach to using the software. The extra time it
takes to go through the tutorial will be compensated for by the
knowledge gained. It is advisable for you to check several
previous designs using PRESTO. This will serve to confirm
your knowledge of the operation and assumptions of this
program.
This chapter contains details on the assumptions and methods
used in PRESTO. Most in-depth technical questions can be
answered by referring to this chapter.
These chapters contain the nomenclature, and printout
explanation, hand calculations, strand and rebar properties,
section types and dimensions, a list of cited references used in
the manual, and glossary.
The Index contains a cross-reference of entries from the
manual. Many times, information about a particular item is
given from different points of view in other sections of the
manual. Therefore, if you have a question regarding a particular
item, it can be very helpful to refer to each entry listed under
that item in the Index.
For your convenience, many of the commonly used terms and references throughout
the manual appear in special styles. The following are examples of these typographical
conventions that allow you to easily recognize key information.
l
a
v
E
Button References
Add
Keyboard References
SHIFT+TAB
Option and Icon References
Option
Pull-down menus, Drop-down lists, Lists, Check

Boxes, Columns, Field References
Beam ID drop-down list
Screens, Dialog Boxes, Tabs, Libraries
System Information screen
Article/Equation References
ACI Art. 9.20.2.4
Note: Unless stated otherwise, references to Art. refer to an article number of

the ACI 318 code(s).
IN-2 / Introduction
PRESTO v8.6
Program Capabilities
PRESTO is a state-of-the-art design tool that has evolved from years of field use. It
provides practical features and functions that allow you to minimize your design time
while maximizing your accuracy. PRESTO provides complete precast beam design
with more features and options than any comparable product. The following list
highlights some of PRESTOs main features:
y
p
o
Design Codes
ACI 318-05
ACI 318-99
CSA 23.3-94 (with updates of 2001)
Ability to design simple-spans with unequal cantilevers.
Ability to place rectangular or circular flange openings anywhere along the

member.
Differentiate topping width over members and between members separately.
Vary topping thickness along members.
Ability to place dead loads on composite or non-composite sections.
Member Geometry
i
t
Load Types
a
u
Apply live loads, i.e., point loads, partial uniform loads, partially distributed
trapezoidal loads.
Non-Prestressed Reinforcement
Ability to place rebar in topping or in precast.
Designate straight, hooked, or mechanically anchored ends on rebar.
l
a
v
E
n
o
Specify stirrup reinforcement
Specify stem mesh reinforcement
Easy-to-use graphical strand pattern input screen.
Ability to select regular, stress-relieved, or low-relaxation strands.
Create different strand patterns at left end, right end, and at depression point.
Ability to shield (debond) straight patterns.
Automatic strand pattern generation.
Automatic shielding of strands.
Specify fractional strands
Strand Pattern Options
PRESTOv8.6
Introduction / IN-3
Section Types
Design all major section types, i.e., Double Tees, Single Tees, Hollow core
slabs, Solid flat slabs, Inverted T-beams, L-beams, Rectangular beams, and
Keystone joists.
Graphical input for sections using the Drawing Editor.
y
p
o
Analysis and Design Features
Compute section properties (composite and non-composite) automatically at

openings and at changes in topping thickness.
Ability to select computer-generated or user-specified prestress losses.
View complete stress histories at release and at final conditions with

different support locations at release and final conditions.
Perform comprehensive ultimate strength computations.
Perform combined vertical shear, torsion, and horizontal shear computations.
Analyze conventional or bilinear deflection.
Ability to work from within Tekla Structures to design/check members.
Ability to export beam drawing to AutoCAD/Microstation.
Ability to export analysis results to spreadsheets.
Work with U.S. units or Metric units.
n
o
Miscellaneous
a
u
i
t
l
a
v
E
IN-4 / Introduction
PRESTO v8.6
Units
Units
PRESTO works with either U.S. or Metric (SI) units. Following is a list of units and
the conversion between both systems.

English
Metric
Conversion Factor*
ft
0.3048
in
mm
25.4
in /ft
mm /m
2116.6667
in2
mm2
645.16
in4
mm4*106
0.41623
kN
4.44822
k-ft
kN-m
1.35582
klf
kN/m
14.5939
ksi
MPa
6.89476
psi
kPa
n
o
pcf
kg/m
plf
psf
i
t
* For example, 1 ft = 0.3048 m
y
p
o
6.89476
16.0185
N/m
14.4939
Pa
47.8803
NOTE: Although you can switch between U.S. and metric units at any time during
program execution, some round-off errors may be introduced due to the fact that for
converting between both systems of units, the program uses only the number of
decimals that are shown on the screen.
a
u
Program Interface
l
a
PRESTO uses the Microsoft Windows interface elements such as tabbed dialog boxes,
pull-down menus, buttons, scroll bars, etc. This interface is very intuitive; it eliminates
the need to memorize keystrokes or commands.
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Introduction / IN-5
Using Online Help
Using Online Help

This program uses the Microsoft Windows online help interface. To access PRESTO
Online Help, select the Contents option from the Help menu or click the Help icon on
the Toolbar.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
FIGURE IN-1. PRESTO Online Help Screen
While running the program, you may access context-sensitive help information by
pressing the F1 key on your keyboard. To exit the Help window, click the X located in
the top right corner of the screen. For example, if you are having difficulty using a
particular screen or dialog box, pressing the F1 key opens the help topic associated
with that screen.
l
a
v
E
User Manual
The entire user manual is available as a PDF document from within the program. To
access this manual, select the User Manual option from the Help menu, or click the User
Manual icon on the toolbar.
IN-6 / Introduction
PRESTO v8.6
CHAPTER TWO
Getting Started
y
p
o
This chapter contains information about installing and authorizing the

program, network setup and technical support. Before installing this
application, it is recommended that you read this chapter.
n
o
System Requirements
The minimum system requirements are as follows:
i
t
Microsoft Windows NT, 2000, or XP

128 MB RAM
Mouse or other pointing device
a
u
100 MB available uncompressed hard disk space

CD-ROM drive
Internet access (recommended)
l
a
1024 768 dpi with 256 colors minimum

Microsoft .NET Framework v1.1 (Refer to Installing and Configuring
Microsoft .NET Framework on page GS-7 for more information.)
LEAP Software Security
v
E
LEAP Software protects all programs with software security keys which
prevent the use of unauthorized copies.
In order to run the program for the first time, you will need to obtain an
authorization code from LEAP Software. This procedure is detailed in
Managing Product Site Keys on page GS-8.
Types of Licenses
LEAP Software offers multiuser network capabilities. All PRESTO licenses
are network licenses, allowing either a single user or multiple users the
flexibility to access the program simultaneously. A predetermined number of
PRESTOv8.6
GS-1
Network Setup
copies of the program may run concurrently on client machines from a single network
server hosting the source copy. Users may also run the program from their local hard
drive after obtaining the licensing information from a server.
With a multiuser license, anyone who has access to the location where the program is
installed can use the program on any networked computer; however, the number of
people actually running the program at any given time may not exceed the maximum
number of users specified by the license.
y
p
o
Network Setup
PRESTO supports the following configurations:
Host/Server
Client Computers
Windows NT/2000/XP Windows NT, 2000, and XP
If you are installing PRESTO for network use, you must select one computer to be the
host for the program. The host will be the computer from which you will run PRESTO
on network clients. The program must be installed on the host.
n
o
After installation of the program, you need to have your copy of PRESTO authorized
for network use. (Refer to Managing Product Site Keys on page GS-8.) When
requesting your authorization code, make sure that you notify LEAP Software of the
number of licensed users you are requesting.
i
t
LEAP Software does not make any guarantees regarding program installation on a
Novell Netware server. (Occasionally, network license users have had difficulties with
compatibility in Novell Netware environments.)
a
u
Authorization Warnings
It is possible that you may permanently lose your authorization when changing your
computer configuration without taking the necessary precautionary steps. A few
actions that may adversely affect your authorization are listed below. If any of these
actions need to be taken, contact LEAP Software for assistance.
l
a
v
E
Formatting your hard drive.

Replacing your hard drive.
Defragmenting your hard drive, without excluding the program directory from
the defragmentation path.
Installing a new operating system.
Upgrading your operating system.
Changing the system time on your computer by more than 75 minutes.
Compressing the directory where the program is located.
Moving the program to another directory or computer without first transferring
authorization.
Installing the program on mirrored drives.
Note: The restoration of a license lost resulting from any of the above actions, without
first consulting LEAP Software, may result in additional reauthorization fees.
GS-2 / Getting Started

PRESTO v8.6
Installing the Program

Before installing the application it is recommended to determine the type of installation. Standalone and server installations require no options to be selected. However, a client installation
requires that the application on the client be provided a path to the security file on the server, as
discussed in step 5 page GS-5.
Note: This program requires Microsoft .NET Framework v1.1. For more information, please
refer toInstalling and Configuring Microsoft .NET Framework on page GS-7.
y
p
o
Note: To install the program, login as an Administrator on the machine you want to do the
installation. Remote installation is not allowed.
1. Download the program from the LEAP Software web site (www.leapsoft.com) and run the
executable file in a temporary location for the installation files to be unzipped to (e.g.,
C:\Temp). After the installation is complete, you can delete all of the unzipped files from
the temporary location.
2. When the Welcome screen displays, click Next and follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
FIGURE GS-1. Welcome Screen
3. The Choose Destination Location screen displays. Browse to the location where the
application will be installed and click Next.
Getting Started / GS-3
y
p
o
FIGURE GS-2. Choose Destination Location
n
o
4. The Security Directory screen displays. This screen is used to select the location of
security files for a client-server configuration.
i
t
If the installation is in a stand-alone configuration or on a Server, do not select

the check box and click Next.
If the installation is on a client, select the check box and use the Browse button
to select the license directory location on the Server. Click Next.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GS-3. Security Directory

PRESTO v8.6
5. If you want to use the program from within Tekla Structures, check the box to
install PRESTO components from within Tekla Structures and select the folder in
which the components are to be installed. Specify only the Tekla Structures version
folder (e.g., C:\Tekla Structures\10.1) Do not point to any sub-folders within the
version folder.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GS-4. Using PRESTO From Within Tekla Structures Option
i
t
6. The Ready to Install the Program window displays. Click Install to start the
installation.
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
FIGURE GS-5. Ready to Install the Program
7. Upon successful installation the Authorize now? dialog displays, as shown in

Figure GS-6 Authorize Now? Dialog on page GS-6.
If you select Yes, refer to Authorizing a Program.
If you select No, the program will prompt for authorization when started.
y
p
o
Note: The program must be authorized before it can be used.
FIGURE GS-6. Authorize Now? Dialog
8. When the last screen displays, click Finish to exit the install wizard.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GS-7. Installation Complete
Note: Give all users of this program full access to the directory where the program
installs and authorizes.
NOVELL INSTALLATION
LEAP Software does not make any guarantees about installations in Novell
Netware environments. (Occasionally, network license users have experienced difficulties with compatibility of workstations using a Windows operating system in Novell Netware environments.)
The installation process is the same as described above for a Novell installation. However, one file needs to be loaded as described in the note below.

PRESTO v8.6
Installing and Configuring Microsoft .NET Framework
Note: A driver called CKSERVER.NLM is copied to the program directory.

On the Novell Server, load the driver and reference it in the AUTOEXEC.NCF
file for automatic startup.
y
p
o
Installing and Configuring Microsoft .NET Framework
To determine if this framework is installed, select: Start > Settings > Control Panel >
Add/Remove Programs. Scroll through the list of programs to see if the Microsoft
.NET Framework v1.1 is listed. If it is, proceed with installation and authorization of
the program. If it is not listed, please go to www.leapsoft.com/dotnet.html and follow
the link to download and install the latest .NET Framework files.
Once the Microsoft .NET installation is complete, the next step is configuration. Refer
to the following table for instructions on how to access the .NET Framework v1.1
Wizards.
Operating System Access Configuration Wizard
n
o
Windows NT
Start > Programs > Administrative tools
Windows 2000
Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative tools
Windows XP
Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative tools
i
t
Once the .NET Framework v1.1 Wizard is open, perform the following steps to
configure the framework.
a
u
l
a
FIGURE GS-8. .Net Framework v1.1 Wizard
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Managing Product Site Keys
1.
Select the Adjust .NET Security icon to open the Security Adjustment
Wizard.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GS-9. Security Adjustment Wizard
2.
3.
i
t
Select the Make changes to this computer option and click Next.
Select the Local Intranet icon, change the level to Full Trust, and click
Next.
a
u
4.
Click the Finish button to accept the changes you made and close the .NET
Framework Wizard.
l
a
The LEAP Software Online Authorization System is the recommended method for
obtaining an authorization code.
Note: Only the Primary Key Holder may login on the Online Authorization System.
v
E
Authorizing a Program
1.
From the Start menu select the program from the LEAP Software folder.
2.
When the Authorization warning dialog opens, click Yes.

PRESTO v8.6
3.
When the LEAP Software Security screen displays, enter your company
information in the Company Information tab.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GS-10. LEAP Software Security Screen
i
t
4.
Go to the LEAP Software web site (www.leapsoft.com) and login.
5.
Select Online Authorization.
6.
When prompted, login with your contact email and password.
7.
At the Client Product Licenses window, click Manage Site Keys for the
product for which the Site Key is required.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GS-11. Client Licenses Screen
PRESTOv8.6
8.
At the Created Site Key window, click Authorize. The Create License
window opens.
y
p
o
FIGURE GS-12. Created Site Key Screen
9.
Cut and paste the site code from the Authorization tab of the Security
window. Enter the number of user accounts required and click GetSiteKey.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GS-13. Security Window Authorization Tab
10. Cut and paste the Site Key into the Site Key field of the Authorization tab.
Click Authorize Program.
Demo Authorization
Upon request, LEAP Software issues special demonstration licenses. A demonstration

license allows you to preview a fully functional version of the program before you
purchase it. The demonstration version of the program is the same as the purchased
version of the program; however, a demonstration version only lasts for a limited time.
To learn more about obtaining a demonstration license, please contact LEAP Software
Sales Representatives at (800) 451-5327.
To authorize a demonstration version of the program, follow the instructions above for
Program Authorization.

PRESTO v8.6
Transferring Authorization
Authorizations may be transferred to different directories and computers. Essentially,
there are three ways you can transfer authorizations:
Direct Transfer on a Single Computer: Transfer the authorization from one
directory to another directory on the same computer.
y
p
o
Floppy Disk Transfer: Transfer the authorization from one computer to another
computer when a network license is not present.
Direct Transfer to a Network Computer: Transfer the authorization from one
computer to another computer on a network when a network license is present.
Direct Transfer on a Single Computer
To move the program to a new directory on your computer, authorization must be

transferred before the program in the new location can be run.
For example, if PRESTO is installed in C:\Programs Files\LEAP Software\Presto

(source directory) and it needs to be moved to D:\Programs (target directory), first
install the program on the new target directory (that is, D:\Programs). After the
installation completes, transfer authorization to the target directory as follows:
n
o
1.
Start the original authorized copy of the program located in the source
directory. Make sure the copy of the program on the target directory is not
running.
2.
Select Security from the File menu to open the LEAP Software Security
screen. Select the Direct Transfer tab.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
FIGURE GS-14. LEAP Software Security Screen Direct Transfer Tab
3.
Enter the location of the target directory in the text box or click Browse to
locate it and click Transfer. The authorization instantly transfers from the
original installation (source directory) to the new installation (target
directory). Now the original program is the unauthorized program and the
new program is the authorized program.
4.
Uninstall the copy of the program no longer using (in this case, C:\Program
Files\LEAP Software\Presto).
Floppy Disk Transfer

If you do not have a network license present and you would like to move the program
to another computer, you first need to transfer the authorization. This can be easily
accomplished via floppy disk transfer by performing the following steps:
y
p
o
1.
You must first install the program on the target computer.
2.
Take a blank, formatted floppy disk to the target computer that contains the
unauthorized copy of the program. This blank floppy disk will be called the
transfer disk.
3.
Insert the transfer disk into the floppy drive and start the unauthorized copy
of the program.
4.
When a message appears notifying you that you have an unauthorized copy
of the program and asks if you would like to authorize it at this time, select
Yes.
5.
When the LEAP Software Security screen displays, select the Register
Transfer tab to open the appropriate screen.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GS-15. LEAP Software Security Screen Register Transfer Tab
6.
Enter the path to the transfer disk (A:\ on most computers), and click the
Register button.
7.
Once the disk automatically initializes, a message appears notifying you that
you need to transfer authorization from an authorized version of the
program. When this message appears, remove the transfer disk from the
computer, exit the program, and take the transfer disk to the source
computer.

PRESTO v8.6
8.
Insert the transfer disk into the floppy drive and start the authorized copy of
the program.
9.
Select Security from the File menu to activate the LEAP Software Security
screen. Select the Transfer Out tab.
10. Enter the path location of the transfer disk (A:\), and click the Transfer
button. At this point, the original authorized copy of the program is
unauthorized and the authorization is on the transfer disk.
y
p
o
11. Take this transfer disk back to the target computer and insert it into the
floppy drive.
12. Start the program. When notified that you have an unauthorized copy of the
program, and asked if you would like to authorize it at this time, click Yes.
13. When the LEAP Software Security screen appears, select the Transfer In tab.
14. Enter the location path of the transfer disk (A:\), and click the Transfer
button.
15. The authorization instantly transfers from the original installation (source
directory) to the new installation (target directory). At this point, the original
program is the unauthorized program and the new program is the authorized
program.
n
o
i
t
Direct Transfer to a Network Computer
If you have a network license and would like to transfer the authorization to another
server/host computer on the network, follow the steps below.
1.
Make sure that the program is installed on the source computer using the
shared option. To check this, open the program and activate the LEAP
Software Security screen. Select the Authorization tab and confirm that
Floating License is in the Current Status field. If it says, Fixed License,
then you do not have a network license for the program.
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
2.
Install the program on the target computer using the same setup type as on
the source computer (e.g., shared). If necessary, restart the target computer to
enable the network protocols.
3.
Depending on your operating system, follow the steps outlined in Network

Setup on page GS-2, to share (with full access) the directory on the target
computer where the program was installed.
4.
From the source program, open the LEAP Software Security screen and
select the Direct Transfer tab. Type the location of the newly mapped
network drive or click the Browse button to find it.
5.
Make sure the program on the target computer is not active. Click the
Transfer button on the LEAP Software Security screen to transfer the license
from the source computer to the new target server/host computer.

6.
At this point, the program authorized on the server/host computer becomes

unauthorized and the new server/host computer becomes authorized.
7.
Follow the setup procedures outlined in Network Setup to complete the

setup process.
Multiple File Copies
Multiple File Copies

Please note that LEAP Software allows multiple users to simultaneously use a single
file. For example, XYZ engineers, Alex and Bob, are simultaneously using the same
PRESTO project file. If Alex saves his work, his changes will be saved; however, if
Bob saves his work after Alex, using that same file name, all of Alexs work will be
completely overwritten and lost. This also applies to other types of PRESTO files such
as libraries and other savable files.
y
p
o
To prevent users from accidentally overwriting another users work, it is recommended

to establish different directories for each individual user.
Program Crash/Temporary Loss of License
In case of an unexpected event such as a program crash, you may be able to fix the
problem by deleting the appropriate file with extension .tb2 from the program
directory. In most cases, this restores authorization. If deleting this file does not correct
the problem, contact the Technical Support Department at LEAP Software.
n
o
Installation of Components to Work from Within Tekla Structures

If you would like to use the program from within Tekla Structures, please make sure
that during the installation you choose the option to install components necessary to
run the program from within Tekla Structures. Refer to Installing the Program (step 5)
on page GS-3 for more information.
i
t
Note that you must install the program as well as Tekla Structures together on the
users system. The program PRESTO, installed on a server accessed through a
shortcut, will not allow the program to work from within Tekla Structures.
a
u
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
Contacting Technical Support

Technical support is available Monday through Friday (except holidays) from 8:00 AM
to 5:00 PM EST at the following numbers:
Tampa
(813) 985-9170
U.S./Canada Toll-Free
(800) 451-5327
International
(813) 985-9170
FAX
(813) 980-3642
E-mail
techsup@leapsoft.com
Web Site
www.leapsoft.com
y
p
o
Your calls are always welcome, but before you call, please consider the following:
Have you checked the user manual and online help system? Did you refer to the
index for all references to the problem item?
If you encounter a problem, retrace your steps and check for incorrectly entered
information.
n
o
Also, please have the following items with you:

Have your input data ready.
i
t
Have the user manual at hand.
If you think that you have found an error in the program, have the steps that we
should follow to reproduce the error.
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
CHAPTER THREE
General Operation
y
p
o
This chapter covers the concepts and procedures of program operation for
PRESTO, screen by screen. Whenever appropriate, refer to the PCI Design
Handbook, 6th Edition (2004), the Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete (ACI 318-99), the Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete (ACI 318-05), CPCI Design Manual, 3rd Edition (1996) and Design
of Concrete Structures CSA 23.3-94.
n
o
i
t
Starting PRESTO
To start PRESTO, use the standard procedure for beginning a program in

Microsoft Windows. When the PRESTO splash screen appears, click
anywhere in the screen area and the programs Project tab displays.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-1. PRESTO Splash Screen
PRESTO Tab Screens

PRESTO uses a tab screen interface. This means that each major screen has a
corresponding tab. You can instantly access a tab screen by selecting its tab
with your mouse.
PRESTOv8.6
GO-1
Project Tab
For your convenience, PRESTO is divided into six main tabs: Project, Member Info,
Materials, Loads, Analysis, and Design. Each tab allows you to enter relevant data,
open various program dialog boxes, or analyze portions of the structure. Select the
appropriate tab to make changes or complete an analysis. Note that when you are
working on a project, the program adds a green check mark to the tab once you have
entered information.
y
p
o
Project Tab
This is the first screen that you encounter in PRESTO. It contains specific information
related to the project, unit selection, design options, and design codes. Note, if you
return to the Project tab at any time to change the units, each screen instantaneously
converts its values, thereby updating the units. You must also select one of the three
available design codes, ACI 318-99, ACI 318-05, or CSA 23.3-94 to proceed with your
project.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-2. Project Tab
When data files are read from a version of PRESTO, prior to 8.3, those will be
assigned to use ACI 318-99, ACI 318-05, or CSA 23.3-94. Please note the status bar, which
shows the selected options for units, design options, and design codes. You can click
directly on the status bar to change these options without returning to the Project tab.
If you change the design code, the Switch Design Code dialog box displays. This dialog
box allows you to select the items to convert to the new code.
Switch Design Code Dialog Box

PRESTO now allows ACI 318-99, ACI 318-05, and Canadian Code CSA 23.3-94. Each of
these code has its own load factors, Phi factors, and allowable stress limits. Note that
CSA code even has different concrete strain limit than ACI. If at any time you switch
from one code to another, program needs to understand if you intend to maintain these
factors as per your original code or change those to default values of newly selected
code. To change factors to the newly. selected code, confirm that switch Design Code is
GO-2 / General Operation

PRESTO v8.6
Member Info Tab
selected. Also confirm that any factor you want to adjust as per new code are checked.
Select OK to switch the code. To cancel and return to your original design code, click
Cancel.
FIGURE GO-3. Switch Design Code Dialog Box
Member Info Tab
y
p
o
The second screen in the tab series allows you to enter the following information:
Beam length, type, section ID, Interior/Exterior Location of Span, Start/End Release
Supports, Start/End Final Supports, Left/Right Boundaries, and Topping.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
FIGURE GO-4. Member Info Tab
Member Info Screen Terms
Beam Length: Overall out-to-out dimension of the beam.
Beam Type: This field is for beam type selection. You may choose from a
list of beams contained in the menu by clicking the arrow to the immediate
right of the field. Before you can select a beam type, it must first be defined
in the Beam Sections Library. Refer to page GO-63 for information on using
this library.
General Operation / GO-3
Member Info Tab
Section ID: The name of the section within the beam type chosen. You may
choose from the drop-down list. Before you can select a section ID, it must
first be defined in the Beam Sections Library.
Span Location: Identifies the location of the span, either interior or end (for
topping overhang). PRESTO uses the span location to determine the
maximum overhang width, as specified in ACI 318-99/05, for sections with
top flanges and sections with cast-in-place topping. Interior spans are
defined as having effective overhanging flanges (if any) on both sides,
whereas end spans are defined as having overhanging flanges on one side
only.
y
p
o
Release Supports Start/End: Start and end locations of stripping loop. The
start is the loop nearest the left beam end and is measured from the left end.
The right end is the loop nearest the right beam end and is measured from the
right end.
Final Supports Start/End: Start and end location of supports at erection.

The start is the support point nearest the left end of the span and is measured
from the left end of the span. The right end is the support point nearest the
right of the span and is measured from the right end of the span.
Boundaries Left/Right: Usually half the center-to-center distance between

members to the left or right of the centerline, respectively. Area loads (loads
with units of ksf or kN/m2) act on the boundary distance.
Use Boundary Distance in Section Properties: This check box is enabled

when the summation of the boundary distance on the left and right is smaller
or equal to the topping width. If this box is checked, the parts of the precast
flange protruding beyond the specified left and right boundary distances are
removed and section properties computed again for the precast section,
which are then used in calculations.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
n
o
Eccentricity: Eccentricity of the topping, if any. Values to the left of the

centerline of the beam are negative, and values to the right are positive. This
information is used to calculate torsional moments.
Gap: The region of the topping located outside the slab, defined by thickness
and width. This value is usually equal to the boundary minus the width of the
slab.

PRESTO v8.6
Member Info Tab
Gap Topping Adjustment: Difference in thickness between the gap and

slab regions of the topping, if any. Note that this value will be added or
subtracted from the thickness. This is not the overall thickness of the gap.
Examples of gap topping adjustment values are illustrated below.
6"
5"
6"
+1"
-1"
(a)
(b)
Thickness = 6"
G ap Topping Adjustm ent = -1"
Thickness = 6"
G ap Topping Adjustm ent = 0"
FIGURE GO-5. Gap Topping Adjustment
Thickness = 6"
G ap Topping Adjustm ent = 1"
Thickness, in: Thickness of topping slab over a particular section. Topping

thickness is recorded in the form, [topping thickness, in] for [length, ft] for
each of the sections. Topping can have different thicknesses specified along
the length of the beam.
Length, ft: Length of the topping over a particular section.
Topping Gap Width: Width of the topping gap. PRESTO divides the
poured-in-place portion of the composite section (topping) into two regions,
slab and gap. If the top widths of the beams are adjacent then the width of
the gap is zero.
l
a
n
o
i
t
a
u
PRESTOv8.6
(c)
7"
v
E
y
p
o
6"
Topping Slab Width: Width of the topping slab. The slab is modeled as a
rectangle and defined as the region directly over the beam, which has a
thickness and a width. Note that the width of a slab may be less than the top
width of the precast. If there is no topping set, the value is equal to zero.
Flange Opening: Click this button to open the Opening Data dialog box.
This button allows you to add an opening in the flange of the beam. Refer to
page GO-6 for information on using this screen. For computational
purposes, circular openings are replaced internally with equivalent
rectangular openings. The transverse dimension is equal to the diameter of
the circle and the longitudinal dimension is set equal to one-half the diameter
of the circle.
Openings in hollow core slabs often occur at the strand location. In such
cases, the effects of cutting the strands can be modeled by introducing
midspan/interior shielding across the openings.
Torsion Parameters: Click this button to open the Torsion Parameters
dialog box. Refer to page GO-7 for information on using this screen. This
button allows you to modify or review the torsion design parameters.
Opening Data Dialog Box

PRESTO allows you to add openings in the flange. Click the Flange Opening button
located on the Member Info tab to open this dialog box.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-6. Opening Data Dialog Box
a
u
Select the type of opening, either rectangular or circular, from the Opening Type dropdown list and then enter the dimensions for the opening in the text boxes. Click the
Add button and it appears in the list on the screen. Continue adding as many openings
as necessary, using the same procedure above. When completed, click the OK button to
return to the Member Info tab. You can modify an opening by highlighting it in the list,
making the changes in the text boxes, and clicking the Modify button. To delete an
opening, highlight it in the list, and click the Delete button.
l
a
Opening Data Screen Terms
v
E
Opening Type: This field is for the opening type selection. It can be either
rectangular or circular. You may choose from a list contained in the menu, by
clicking the arrow to the immediate right of the drop-down list.
bo: Dimension of opening transverse or perpendicular to the span. If the

opening is circular, enter diameter in this field.
lo: Dimension of opening parallel to span. This field is disabled for circular
openings since it is not applicable.
f1: Location of centerline of the opening, measured from the left end of the
member.

PRESTO v8.6
Torsion Parameters Dialog Box
f2: Offset of opening, measured from the centerline of the member.

Openings to the left of the centerline, looking toward the right end of the
member, should have a negative distance; openings to the right are positive.
Torsion Parameters Dialog Box
y
p
o
Click the Torsion Parameters button located on the Member Info tab to open this
dialog box. This dialog box allows you to modify or edit the clearance factors for
horizontal and vertical clearance as well as the areas and perimeters for torsional
calculations.
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-7. Torsion Parameters Dialog Box
Torsion Parameter Screen Terms
a
u
Horizontal Clearance: Distance between centerline of closed torsional

stirrup and the edge of the beam.
Vertical Clearance: Distance between centerline of closed torsional stirrup

and the top/bottom of the beam.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Acp: Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross-section.
Pcp: Outside perimeter of the concrete cross-section.
Aoh: Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse

torsional reinforcement.
ph: Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional

reinforcement.
Materials Tab
Materials Tab
This screen allows you to specify the prestressing, concrete, and rebar properties.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-8. Materials Tab
The first area to be filled in relates to the prestressing tendon. Select the strand from the
Prestressing Tendon ID drop-down list.
i
t
Before moving on to the next section, if applicable to your project, you should enter the
value for Debonding Increment and specify the maximum number of strands that can be
debonded as the maximum percentage of each row, or of the total number of strands.
These values are used only if the automatic shielding option is used.
a
u
Enter the information for concrete and rebar properties by typing the values in the
appropriate box, or select from the drop-down lists. The program automatically
calculates the elasticity, but you can manually edit the number.
l
a
Materials Screen Terms
v
E
Prestressing Tendon ID: This field is for strand type selection. You may
choose from a list contained in the menu, by clicking the arrow to the
immediate right of the drop-down list.
Initial Jacking Co-efficient: By default, this value is read in from the

strand library based on the tendon ID picked. This value is then used to
populate the Pull field in the Strand definition grid.
Debonding Increment: The length at each end (left and right) measured
from the precast end respectively.
Maximum Auto-Debonding Percentage:
Per Row: Allows you to enter the maximum percentage of straight

strands in each row that can be debonded.
Total: Allows you to enter the total maximum percentage of the total
number of straight strands that can be debonded.

PRESTO v8.6
Materials Tab
Unit Weight (Release/Final): The unit weight of the precast concrete is a

measure of the density of the material. Should be in the range of 90-160 pcf
(1400-2600 kg/m3), and is usually equal to 150 pcf (2500 kg/m3). Concrete
with a unit weight between 110 and 150 pcf (1800-2500 kg/m3) is assumed
by the program to be sand-lightweight concrete. Concrete with a unit
weight of less than 110 pcf (1800 kg/m3) is assumed to be all lightweight
concrete. In CSA mode, program uses range 1500-2500 kg/m3 for lambda
calculations.
Unit Weight (Topping): The unit weight of the topping concrete is a

measure of the density of the material. Should be in the range of 90-160 pcf
(1400-2600 kg/m3), and is usually equal to 150 pcf (2500 kg/m3). Concrete
with a unit weight between 110 and 150 pcf (1800-2500 kg/m3) is assumed
by the program to be sand-lightweight concrete. Concrete with a unit
weight of less than 110 pcf (1800 kg/m3) is assumed to be all lightweight
concrete. In CSA mode, program uses range 1500-2500 kg/m3 for lambda
calculations.
Lambda: This is the lightweight factor. As per ACI, this factor is computed
as per 11.2.1.2. In CSA mode, this is computed as per 8.6.5. Program
updates this value when unit weight is changed.
Strength: Strength of concrete.
Strength (Release): Compressive strength of the precast concrete at time of

release or stripping. Should be 2000 psi ( 13 MPa). Should not exceed
strength at final.
y
p
o
i
t
a
u
Strength (Final): Specified final compressive strength of the precast

concrete. Also known as the 28-day strength. Should be in the range of
3000-20000 psi (20-140 MPa).
Strength (Topping): Specified compressive strength of the topping, if any.

Should be in the range of 1000-20000 psi (7-140 MPa).
Elasticity: Modulus of elasticity. The program, using ACI 318-99/05, Art. 8.5.1,
automatically calculates the elasticity; however, the user may modify it.
Elasticity (Release): The flexural modulus of elasticity of the precast

concrete at release or stripping (initial) can either be calculated by the
program or entered by the user. The modulus of elasticity for precast
concrete at release should be 1000 ksi ( 6800 MPa). PRESTO uses the
following equation:
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
n
o
w ci1.5 33 f ci psi
w ci1.5 0.043 f ci MPa
Materials Tab
For CSA mode, the following equation is used:

1.5
w ci
3300 f + 6900 -----------
ci
2300
MPa
Elasticity (Final): The flexural modulus of elasticity of the precast concrete

at final can either be calculated by the program or entered by the user. The
modulus of elasticity is also defined as the ratio of the normal stress to the
corresponding strain. This value should be 1000 ksi ( 6800 MPa).
PRESTO uses the following equation:
w c1.5
(33 f c ) psi
w c1.5 0.043 f c MPa

1.5
wc
3300 f + 6900 -----------
c
2300
y
p
o
n
o
MPa
Elasticity (Topping): The flexural modulus of elasticity of the topping can

either be calculated by the program or entered by the user. The modulus of
elasticity for topping should be 1000 ksi ( 6800 MPa). PRESTO uses the
following equation:
i
t
a
u
w ct1.5 33 f ct psi
w ct1.5 0.043 f ct MPa
l
a
v
E
1.5
w ct
3300 f + 6900 -----------
ct
2300
MPa
cu: Ultimate compressive strain of the concrete, usually equal to 0.003 in/in
(mm/mm) in ACI and 0.0035 in/in (m/m) in CSA. This value is used in both
the strain compatibility analysis and the calculation of the balanced and
limiting values of the steel ratios. Should not exceed 0.003 as specified in
ACI 318-99/05, Art. 10.2.3.and should be limited to 0.0035 as per CSA.
fct: Average splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete. The
value fct/6.7 is used in lieu of

ACI 318-99/05,
f c'
in some calculations. As specified in
the value fct/6.7 (1.8 fct) shall not exceed
f c'
fy: Specified yield strength of the mild reinforcement used to resist flexure.
Should be in the range of 30-100 ksi (200-700 MPa).

PRESTO v8.6
Loads Tab
fs: The permissible tensile stress in the mild flexural steel. Can be calculated
by the program or manually entered by the user. The program uses 0.6fy ksi
(MPa). The tension stress should be fy and fy/4. The program uses fs to
calculate the tension steel of release, if required.
fy, shear: Specified yield strength of the mild reinforcement used to resist
shear. Should be in the range of 30-100 ksi (200 - 700 MPa).
y
p
o
Loads Tab
This screen is where the load information is entered. PRESTO automatically computes
dead loads due to self-weight of girders and topping, based on the geometry and
material information provided. You may enter additional loads as concentrated loads,
uniform loads, or linearly varying loads.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
FIGURE GO-9. Loads Tab
v
E
To define a load, select the type of load from the Type drop-down list and class from the
Class drop-down list. Enter the values in the Mag, Loc, Mag, and Loc fields and, in the
Description field, type a description of the load.
You must click the Add button to add the load to the permanent load list. To delete a
permanent load, highlight it in the list and click the Delete button. To modify a
previously entered load, select it in the list, change the items or values accordingly, and
click the Modify button.
Loads Screen Terms
PRESTOv8.6
Type: This field is for selecting the different types of loads you want. There
are three types of loads available in PRESTO: Concentrated, Uniform, and
Linear Loads. Note that uniform loads are not applied to openings.
Analysis Tab
Class: This field is for class selection. You can select from five choices,
Dead Load (non-composite), Superimposed Dead Load (composite),
Composite Snow Load in ACI 318-99 or Roof Live/Snow/Rain Load on
Composite in ACI 318-02, Live Load, and Sustained Live Load.
Mag and Loc fields: The loads are located on the member by entering data
as follows:
y
p
o
Mag1 at Loc 1 to Mag2 at Loc2

where:
Mag1 is the beginning magnitude of linear loads or the total of

uniform and concentrated loads.
Loc1 is the location of the start of linear and uniform loads or the
location of a concentrated load, measured from the left beam end.
Mag2 is the ending magnitude of linear loads.
Loc2 is the end location of the linear and uniform loads, measured
from the left beam end.
n
o
PRESTO knows which magnitudes and locations are necessary for each
load type. If a particular magnitude or location is not required for a load

type, e.g., Loc2 for a concentrated load, then that field will be protected by
the program and will be unavailable.
i
t
Note: NOTE: In DOS versions of PRESTO, if you set the ending location to
zero, the program assumed that the load is continuous from the beginning
location to the end of the member. This is no longer valid in PRESTO v8.x.
v
E
Ecc: This field refers to the eccentricity of the load, measured from the
centerline. Values to the left of the centerline are negative, and values to the
right are positive.
Description: This field should be used to enter an optional description of

each load, e.g., Office LL or Roofing Mat.
a
u
l
a
Analysis Tab
This is the fifth screen in the tab series. Here, you can specify check points, specify
load factors, run the structural analysis, and view analysis results after the analysis is
complete by clicking the Run Analysis button. You must run the analysis before you
can move on to the Design tab. Once the analysis is finished, the results appear onscreen, as shown below. (Use the scroll bar on the right side of the screen to view the
results at the bottom.) Use the drop-down lists to select the type of results you would
like to view.

PRESTO v8.6
Load Factors Dialog Box
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-10. Analysis Tab
n
o
i
t
Printing the individual results is as simple as clicking the Print button. This opens the
Print screen. You can print the results to a printer or export to spreadsheets. If you
choose to export to spreadsheets, you must first designate a file name in the text box.
PRESTO also offers you the option of manually changing the load factors and check
points using the Load Factors and Check Points dialog boxes. Alternatively, you can
select the option to run analysis automatically by setting it up in the Show|
Preferences dialog as shown in Figure GO-68.
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Click the Load Factors button on the Analysis tab to display the Load Factors dialog
box. Here, you can modify the values for ultimate and service load factors, self-weight
load multipliers at release and final, and bearing. Click the OK button to accept any
changes and return to the Analysis tab. Click the Cancel button to return to the
Analysis tab and ignore any changes made.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-11. Load Factors Dialog Box
The dead and live load factors (DL and LL factors) are ultimate factors, as specified in
Section 9.2 of ACI 318-99. A factor for the snow dead loads has been included on this
screen. This factor is 1.2, as specified in ACI 362.1R-97, Section 2.2.5.2. For CSA, the
load factors are as per CSA 23.3-94, Section 8.3.
i
t
For ACI 318-02, the load types for snow is coupled as external loads, which may also
include roof live loads and/or rain loads. The load factors are initialized either
internally based on Art. 9.2.1, Eq. 9-2 or from the Settings file. Refer to page GO-55 for
information on the Save Settings feature of the program.
a
u
If, at any time, a user switches code from ACI 318-99 to ACI 318-02, or to CSA 23.3, or
vice versa, the program provides the option to either retain the load factors specified or
update the factors based on code-specified values.
l
a
v
E
Multipliers of the self-weight at release and final conditions allow you to vary the
effective self-weight of the member. For example, a wall panel might have a selfweight multiplier of 1.0 at release when the panel is horizontal and a multiplier of 0.0
at final when it is vertical (i.e., self-weight is not causing flexure).
The Snow Loads (in ACI-99) and the external loads Lr/S/R (in ACI-05 and CSA
codes) can optionally be treated acting as Live Loads by selecting the option to model
as LL instead of model as SDL (default).
Although these loads will be treated as live loads, they will still be able to use a
different Load Factor than the live loads. The effects of this selection will be seen
primarily in the losses and stress computations.
Bearing refers to the bearing overload factor and is multiplied by the calculated support
reactions during the bearing steel analysis. This value is usually equal to 1.15.

PRESTO v8.6
Check Points Dialog Box

Click the Check Points button on the Analysis tab to open the Check Points dialog
box. Here, you can modify or add points to be checked during analysis in addition to or
instead of points selected by the program. The points are measured from the left end of
the member. To add a location, enter a value in the Location text box and click the Add
button. It will appear in the list on the screen. To modify a previously defined location,
highlight it in the list, edit the value in the text box, and click the Modify button. You
can also delete a location by highlighting it in the list and clicking the Delete button.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
FIGURE GO-12. Check Points Dialog Box
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
For prestressed members, the default check points are H/2 and transfer length, 0.4L,
0.5L, and 0.6L, where L is the overall length of the member and H is the overall height.
For mild reinforced beams, the default check points are 0.8H, 0.25L, 0.4L, 0.5L, and
0.6L. Note that this does not mean to imply that the default check points are the critical
areas of the design. You must determine the critical sections of your design.
Click the Reset button to overwrite any changes made and reset the check points to the
default settings.
The Clear All button deletes all the check points defined. The Defaults button ads the
check points at the default check points specified above. The Auto Generate button
brings up the screen shown in Figure GO-13 and allows the user to specify multiple
check points in an easy and rapid way. Using the auto generate feature will wipe out
the existing user-defined locations.
Design Tab
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-13. Auto Generate Check Points Dialog Box
Selecting the Include User Specified Option check box makes the other controls in
the group available. These start and end locations, along with the interval and include
points options, allow for easy generation of check points between these locations either
at specific locations (such as tenth points) or at an increment of a fixed distance
increment (5, 10, 15 etc.). The options for Include Check Points at all point load
locations and transfer length will automatically add check points at any location where
the concentrated loads are added, and at transfer length distance from either end of the
beam respectively. If the option Limit check points only for first half beam is
selected, check points will be added only up to a distance of 0.5L. This option avoids
adding multiple check points when working with symmetrical beams.
i
t
a
u
l
a
Design Tab
v
E
The final screen in the tab series allows you to select and set the parameters that control
the beam design, enter either the strand pattern and/or the rebar pattern, and check the
design status. Each of the associated dialog boxes, accessed by selecting the buttons at
the bottom of the screen, is described on the following pages. The Design tab also
shows schematic sketches of the beam cross-section along with the strands or rebar and
the side view of the beam. You can click the Drawing button to print the schematic
drawing, either to a printer or export to an AUTOCAD DXF format.

PRESTO v8.6
Design Parameters Dialog Box
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-14. Design Tab
n
o
Click the Design Parameters button located on the Design tab to open this dialog box.
By selecting the appropriate tab, you can modify the design options, phi factors, losses,
stresses, and deflection multipliers. Click the OK button at any time to accept changes
in all six tabs or click the Cancel button to discard all the changes.
Design Options Tab
a
u
i
t
Click the Design Options tab to display the appropriate screen. Here, you can select
various design options to appear in the analysis, such as transform strand, bearing
analysis, end rotations, composite shear depth, horizontal shear, and bilinear analysis.
You can also review or modify the steel fy, bearing length, and distance of CL of
bearing, etc., by clicking the Bearing Steel Info button. Refer to page GO-26 for
information on using the Bearing Steel Info dialog box.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-15. Design Options Tab in ACI 318-05 Mode
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-16. Design Options Tab in CSA 23.3-94 Mode
Design Options Screen Terms
Transform Strand: Usually PRESTO only takes into account the mild
rebar when calculating the transformed section properties. If this option is
selected, the program also considers the strand when calculating the
transformed section properties.
Bearing Analysis: Selecting this option will have the program perform a
check for required bearing steel. Note that if your member has no bottom

PRESTO v8.6
flange, the bearing analysis will be performed based on the bearing load and
dimensions for a single stem.
At a cantilever, PRESTO only checks for unreinforced bearing capacity, it
does not check crack angles. A bearing is defined as a cantilever if it is
located further than a distance h from the end of the member.
y
p
o
Area A1 is defined as the actual bearing area (length width). Area A2 is

that area concentric with A1 and is equally larger on all sides, if possible. A2
is limited by the first free edge that it encounters. This means that if area A1
is adjacent to a free edge, A2 will equal A1.
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-17. Bearing Analysis
a
u
PRESTO uses a modified PCI Eq. 4.6.1 that has an upper limit on Vn based
on ACI 318-99/02, Art. 10.17.1. Ash is calculated using an assumed value of 3.4
for the factor; therefore, you should think of it as a minimum
recommended value.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
End Rotations: Select this option to have the program calculate end
rotations and elastic shortening. Note that the elastic shortening does not
include effects from creep and shrinkage.
Composite Shear Depth: Select this option to use the composite depth
during the shear calculations. If not selected, the program uses only the noncomposite depth. If you opt to use the total composite depth to resist vertical
shear, PRESTO uses the lower concrete strength (usually the topping) when
calculating the capacity of the concrete to carry vertical shear, as specified in
ACI 318-99/05, Art. 17.2.3.
Horizontal Shear: Select this option to calculate the required horizontal

steel in the analysis. Note that the program does not calculate horizontal
shear unless this option is selected.
Bi-Linear Analysis: If the net bottom tension at service conditions at

midspan exceeds the cracking tension and you selected this option,
PRESTO calculates the deflections based on the bilinear deflection
procedure as specified in [Ref (1)] in accordance with ACI 318-99, Art.
18.4.2(d).
If not selected, the program performs a conventional linear elastic

deflection analysis. This option is not used in ACI 318-05 because in that case,
the program automatically computes bilinear deflections if the section is
classified as T (Transition) or C (Cracked).
Live Load Recapture: Selecting this option will take into account the
temporary increase in strand stress when the live load is applied (Live Load
Recapture of prestress loss). If not selected, the program ignores this
temporary condition. Load Live Recapture is defined as the temporary
increase of tensile stress in the prestressed tendons only during the
application of the superimposed live load. Note that live load recapture is
only available for PCI and time-dependent losses.
y
p
o
User Location for Cracking Moment: When this option is not selected, the
program uses the location with the smallest Mn to Mu ratio and prints the
calculated cracking moment. If you select this option, you must assign a
section at which you want to have the program print the cracking moment in
the appropriate text box. Note that if you selected this option and left the
field equal to zero, the cracking moment will not be printed.
User Location for Detailed Losses: When this option is not selected, the
program will print detailed calculations of the prestress losses at midspan of
the member. If you select this option, you must enter a value in the
appropriate text box for the section where you want the detailed loss
calculations to be printed.
PCI Design Handbook (6th edition) Shear and Torsion Method: When
this option is selected, PRESTO will use the methodology described in
section 4.4 of the PCI Design Handbook (reference 9) to compute shear and
torsion. This method is available for all sections other than for Hollow Core
sections. This option is only available in the ACI design modes and not
available if the Canadian code is selected on the project tab.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
n
o
Create Pattern Assuming: When in ACI 318-05, the program can create an
automatic strand pattern for either Uncracked or Transition classes. These
are two of the three listed classes in ACI 318-05, Art. 18.3.3. PRESTO does
not create patterns for class C (Cracked). This option has no effect when a
user enters strands manually. Further, this is applicable only to prestressed
beams and has no effect on reinforced beams.
Shear and Torsion Calculation: In CSA mode, program provides option to

do shear and torsion design using simplified method as per CSA 23.3-94
Section 11-3 or using general method as per Section 11-4.
Prestress and Losses Tab

To modify any prestress loss information, click the Prestress and Losses tab to open the
screen as shown in the figure below. Here, you can specify the release time and relative
humidity percentage if you would prefer the program to calculate the losses using the

PRESTO v8.6
PCI or time-dependent method. You may, on the other hand, enter the release and final
losses manually; thereby overriding the values calculated by the program.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-18. Prestress and Losses Tab
The PCI analysis uses the equations found in the PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition),
Art. 4.7. Time-dependent losses follows the procedure defined in the article
Recommendations for Estimating Prestress Losses from the PCI Journal, JulyAugust, 1975. Time-dependent losses assume accelerated curing, and creep and
shrinkage are assumed to both start at release. User-defined losses allow you to enter
the release and final losses, expressed as a percentage.
i
t
a
u
Prestress and Losses Screen Terms
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Hours to Release: Number of hours between tensioning and detensioning of

the strands. Used in the prestressed loss computations. Note that for
mathematical correctness, the tensioning of the strand is defined to take
place at 1 hour (not 0 hours).
Relative Humidity: Average ambient humidity expressed as a percentage.

The relative humidity is used to calculate prestressed losses. Refer to the PCI
Design Handbook (5th Edition), Figure 3.12.2 for the average relative
humidity in your area.
Days to Topping/Comp DL: If you specified that the program will calculate
prestressed losses using the time-dependent losses, enter both the days
between release and the application of the topping and the days between
release and the application of the composite dead load. Note that PRESTO
requires that the application of the composite dead load take place after the
application of the topping. Both values must be greater than zero even if you
do not have either topping or composite dead load.
Release/Final: If you selected to have the program calculate the prestressed

losses using the user-defined losses, you must enter both the prestress loss at
release and final. Both values are calculated as percentages (e.g., 10%).
Strand Stress/Strain Model: PRESTO allows users to select from three

stress-strain models. One model is based on the PCI Design Handbook (5th
Edition), Design Aid 11.2.5. Second model is based on CPCI Design Manual
(3rd Edition). Figure 8.2.4. The third model is that which was present in
older versions of this program.
y
p
o
Deflection Multiplier Tab
To review or modify the deflection multipliers, click the Deflection Multiplier tab to
display the screen as shown in the following figure. The default values, as specified in
the PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition), Table 4.8.2, are used to estimate the long-term
cambers and deflections for typical members when the Prestressed design option is
selected. If the Reinforced design option is selected, these values are ignored and ACI
318-99/05, Art. 9.5.2.5 is automatically applied.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
FIGURE GO-19. Deflection Multiplier Tab
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
Phi Factors Tab

To review or modify the strength reduction factors, click the Phi Factors tab to display
the appropriate screen, as shown below.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-20. Phi Factors Tab
i
t
Edit the factors by typing over them. Phi factors, are either strength reduction factors,
or material resistance factor. Phi factors in ACI code as equal to the ratio of the design
strength to the nominal strength. PRESTO provides strength reduction phi factors for
flexure, shear, and bearing. In ACI 318-05, phi for tension controlled sections as well as
compression controlled sections are to be specified. The phi factor for compressioncontrolled sections is 0.65, flexure (tension-controlled sections) is 0.90, and shear is
0.85. In the U.S., concrete and steel phi factors are generally not used, so in ACI mode
these should be set equal to 1.0. The phi factor for bearing is applied to the calculation
of the required bearing steel, if any, and is usually equal to 0.85 contrary to ACI 318-99/
05. Canadian code CSA 23.3-94 Section 8.4 requires that material resistance factors to be
used with force components within each material rather than overall strength reduction
factors. Even though program uses material and strength factors in design, it is
suggested the only one of the two sets be used. The c/dt ratio is enabled and used only
in ACI 318-05. PRESTO uses these limits to determine if the section is tensioncontrolled, compression-controlled, or is in transition. Thus, it determines appropriate
phi values for its behavior as per ACI 318-02, Art. 9.3.2.2.
a
u
l
a
v
E
Miscellaneous Data Tab
PRESTOv8.6
To modify or review data for shoring, length multipliers, and effective width of
topping, click the Miscellaneous Data tab. The appropriate screen will display, as
shown in the figure below.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-21. Miscellaneous Data Tab
i
t
There are three types of shoring allowed in PRESTO: None, Elevated, and Touch. None
indicates that the member is erected and is supported at its final support locations only.
Elevated specifies that the entire weight of the system, self-weight included, is
temporarily supported by shoring until the topping has cured. Therefore, the composite
section supports all gravity loads. And the last type of shoring, Touch, is where the
member is erected and then supports its own self-weight (SW) and dead loads (DL)
specified to be supported by the precast (non-composite dead loads, excluding topping
weight). However, all additional weight added to the system is supported by a
theoretical uniform shoring system placed under the member until the topping has
cured, after which the shoring is removed. The following table shows the section type
(N = non-composite (precast), C = composite) supporting each loading type under
various shoring condition after the shoring is removed.
a
u
l
a
v
E
SW
DL
Topping
SD
LL
None
Elevated
Touch
Length Multipliers are used to calculate the development and transfer lengths for
bonded and debonded strands based on the basic development and transfer lengths.
Bonded strands are those that have no debonding.
Miscellaneous Data Screen Terms
Transfer - Bonded: This number is multiplied by the basic transfer length to

obtain the transfer length for bonded strands.

PRESTO v8.6
Transfer - Debonded: The basic transfer length is multiplied by this number

to obtain the transfer length for debonded strands.
Development - Bonded: The basic development length is multiplied by this

number to obtain the development length for bonded strands.
Development - Debonded: The basic development length is multiplied by

this number to obtain the development length for debonded strands.
Topping Effective Width: If the Computed option is selected, the program

automatically computes the effective width of the topping and uses this
value in all of the calculations. (For details on effective width computation,
refer to Section Properties in the Theory chapter.) However, if the Manual
option is selected, then the Modify button becomes available. Clicking this
button will open the User Defined Effective Width of Topping dialog box.
Refer to page GO-27 for information on using this screen.
y
p
o
Allowable Stress Tab
Click the Allowable Stress tab to review or modify the release stresses and final
stresses, as shown in the following figures. You are free to alter the allowable stress
values by typing over the default values. In order to have the program use the default
stress factors to calculate the stresses; you must select the Use Factors check box. Note
that if this box is checked, the fields on this screen are disabled and the program will
use the values specified in the Stress Factors dialog box. Refer to page GO-28 for
information on using this screen.
n
o
i
t
The default factors calculated by the program are as specified in ACI 318-99/05, Chapter
For each design code, the corresponding values are initialized. There are various
values that are specific to ACI 318-05 and are enabled only when that code is selected.
18.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-22. Allowable Stress Tab (ACI 318-99 and CSA 23.3-94)
PRESTOv8.6
Bearing Steel Info Dialog Box
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-23. Allowable Stress Tab (ACI 318-05)
i
t
Click the Edit Factors button to modify the stress factors using the Stress Factors
dialog box. Refer to page GO-28 for information on using this screen.
Bearing Steel Info Dialog Box
a
u
Click the Bearing Steel Info button located on the Design Options tab of the Design
Parameters dialog box to open this screen. Here, you can modify or review the bearing
shear data for steel, bearing length, and distance to CL of bearing. Click the OK button
to accept any changes and return to the Design Options tab. Click the Cancel button to
discard any changes.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-24. Bearing Steel Info Dialog Box

PRESTO v8.6
User-Defined Effective Width of Topping Dialog Box
Bearing Steel Info Screen Terms
Steel Fy: Specified yield strength of mild reinforcement used to resist

bearing forces, if required by analysis. Should be in the range of 30-100 ksi
(200-700 MPa).
Bearing Length: Length of the bearing surface, measured parallel to the

span of the member from the end of the member to the back of the bearing
plate.
Bearing Width: Width of the bearing plate or surface, measured

perpendicular to the span of the member. Note that if your member does not
have a bottom flange, PRESTO assumes that the bearing analysis will be
performed for a single stem.
Distance to CL of Bearing: Distance from the end of the member to the

centerline of the bearing reaction, measured parallel to the span of the
member.
Nu/Vu: Ratio of the horizontal force to the vertical force at the support.
Usually equal to 0.20.
Theta Min/Max/Inc: The minimum and maximum angles to be checked for

possible cracking, along with the increment between the minimum and
maximum. The number of sections checked by the program during the
bearing analysis is equal to the maximum crack angle minus the minimum
crack angle divided by the increment. The maximum and minimum angles
should be in the range of 0 to 90 degrees.
Use Manual Input Cr value: When reinforcement is provided in direction

of Nu or when Nu is zero, the Cr value can be manually input as 1.0 in this
field.
y
p
o
n
o
a
u
i
t
User-Defined Effective Width of Topping Dialog Box

To open this dialog box, select the Manual option on the Miscellaneous Data tab of the
Design Parameters dialog box, then click the Modify button. Here, you can modify the
effective width of topping (Beff) for the different topping sections along the beam. The
Reset button overrides any changes you make and internally recomputes the Beff
based on the ACI code.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Stress Factors Dialog Box
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-25. User Defined Effective Width of Topping Dialog Box
Note that the program internally adjusts the Beff value specified here by the user to
handle opening information.
n
o
Stress Factors Dialog Box
To define the stress factors, select the Use Factors check box and click the Edit Factors
button on the Allowable Stress tab of the Design Parameters dialog box. Edit the values
as required by the project parameters and click the OK button to accept the values and
return to the Allowable Stress tab.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-26. Stress Factors Dialog Box (ACI 318-99)

PRESTO v8.6
Strand and Rebar Pattern Dialog Box
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-27. Stress Factors Dialog Box (ACI 318-05)
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-28. Stress Factors Dialog Box (CSA 23.3-94)
Note that the stress specified at the ends are considered for a distance of transfer length
from the ends of the beams. For ACI 318-05, additional factors are specified to classify
the section as uncracked, transition, or cracked. For CSA 23.3-94, the allowable tension
factors are multiplied with
(the lightweight factor).

To modify or review strand and rebar data, click the Strand and Rebar button on the
Design tab. The Strand and Rebar dialog displays. On this tab dialog, the Strand tab
allows you to define strands. The Longitudinal Bars tab allows you to define rebars.
PRESTOv8.6
The Stem Stirrups tab allows you to define shear reinforcement (vertical stirrups). The
layout of these tabs are further dependent on section type of the beam being designed.
For double tee sections, the program expects input of strands/rebars per web. For all
other sections, the program expects total input. Therefore, you will see a somewhat
different dialog while editing a double tee section and a different dialog for all other
sections, as explained below.
y
p
o
Strand Tab
The Strand tab allows you to define strand grid template, strand profile, and groups of
strand with details of each group including strand heights, strand ID, debonding and
pull.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
FIGURE GO-29. Strand Tab Showing Live Graphics
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-30. Strand Tab Showing Template Definitions
The Strand tab displays two graphic areas (Figures GO-28, GO-29, GO-30,.and GO31). The left graphic area shows beam cross section and the right area shows beam
elevation. These two graphics depend on the check box View Template with
definitions. If you elect to check that box, template graphics are shown in which you
can refer various inputs on this screen. However, when this box is unchecked, both
views show live graphics. As you add or delete strand, they are shown graphically, in
section and elevation. You can even use the scroll bar to see any section along beam
length.
a
u
l
a
.
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
FIGURE GO-31. Strand Tab for Double Tee Showing Live Graphics
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-32. Strand Tab for Double Tee Showing Template Definitions
n
o
Additionally you can either manually specify the strands or click Auto Design button
and PRESTO will automatically design the strand pattern.
For all sections other than Double Tee, you can define a grid for strand template and
specify strands at the grid crossings. Update that before performing the generation of
strands by performing the following steps:
i
t
For sections other than Double Tee strands, perform the following steps:
1.
Specify the X-Axis Grid Definitions for strand template at ends for sections
other than double tee.
a
u
l
a
v
E
Example: if you want to specify location of first strand from left

face of beam section at 3 inches and then five more possible
locations as 2 inches, specify 1*3, 5*2.
2.
Specify the Y-Axis Grid Definitions.
This is the placement of strand layers (rows) with respect to the

bottom of beam. If you want to place the first row at 2.5 inches
from bottom and then four more rows at 2 inches, then specify
1*2.5, 4*2.
3.
Specify maximum number of strands that you want to provide in each layer.
Use this value for sections such as Inverted Tee, I and L which
allows many more strands in the bottom rows but fewer strand in
the web. If you want to allow a maximum of six strands in layer 1,
four strands in layer 2, and two strands in layers 3 through 6,
specify 1*6, 1*4, and 4*2 in the Max Strands for Rows.
At this point you can either do Auto Design or manually input
strands.

PRESTO v8.6
For a Double Tee section, perform the following steps:

1.
Select Strand Vertical Planes. By default program uses Single. When single
is selected, program provides only one strand per web at any height. Select
Double, or Triple if you have two or three strands at same height per web.
(Check the box View Template to see the grid graphically)
2.
Specify spacing between Strand vertical planes. If the strand vertical planes
field is set to single, this spacing is not used. However, when more than one
vertical planes are used, specify their spacing.
3.
Y-Axis Grid definition. Specify the heights of possible strand layers from
bottom.
y
p
o
After specifying the data items explained above, you can either do Auto Design or
manually input strands in any section I type. To generate the strand pattern, click the
Auto Design button. To manually input the pattern, perform the following steps for any
section.
To manually specify strands, perform the following steps:
1.
n
o
Select the strand profile.
Choose one of the following options for strand profiles:
One Point
One Point Fixed
Two Point Variable
Zero Point (straight)
a
u
i
t
2.
Select if the strands profile at left and right ends are the same, or not.
3.
Specify strand profile distances A, B, C or D (whichever is applicable) for

the selected profile.
4.
To add group of strands, click in the Strand Definition Grid in Column Left
Row.
l
a
v
E
Specify the row number in which to place the strand at left end of
beam.
5.
Specify the debond distance from left end of beam for this group of strands.
6.
Specify the column numbers in which the strands are to be placed.

Example: to specify strands in columns 2, 4, 5, and 7 of defined
grid, type in 2, 4-5, 7 or 2, 4, 5, 7.
7.
Select the strand ID from the available list.
8.
Specify the pull ratio in the Pull column (default value is invoked from the
library).
9.
Define mid debonding beginning location and ending location when

unsymmetrical strands are provided.
Specify only beginning locations when strand profile is symmetric.
PRESTOv8.6
10. For strand profile when left profile is not the same as right profile, specify
the Right Row where strands end.
11. For unsymmetrical profiles, also specify if there is any debonding at right.
To add additional groups, repeat steps 4 through 11.
y
p
o
Note that while using the Strand and Rebar screen, all of the grids feature a right mouse
click menu. The menu includes the Insert, Delete, Cut, Copy and Paste for quick input
of data in the grids. This menu is shown in Figure GO-34.
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-33. Strand and Rebar Screen Grid Menu
Strand Tab Screen Terms
X-Axis Grid Definition: X-Axis Grid Definition allows you to define

column locations of the strand template grid from the left edge of the section.
For example: 7*2 means there are seven columns with 2 inch spacing. First
column is at 2 inches from the left edge of the section. The Second column is
at 4 inches, and the seventh column is at 14 inches from the left edge of the
section.
Y-Axis Grid Definition: Y-Axis Grid Definition allows you to define the
row location of template grid of the section along Y-Axis. For example, 8*2
means eight rows along the y-axis. Therefore, the first row is at 2 inches
from bottom, and the second row is at 4 inches, and eighth row is at 16
inches from the bottom. The measurements, 2*2,1*3,1*5 means there are
four rows with previous first row at 2 inches from the bottom, second row is
at 2 inches from the previous row, and the third row is at 3 inch spacing from
previous row. Overall, this makes it 7 inches from the bottom and fourth row
is 5 inches from previous row making it 12 inches from the bottom.
Max Strands for Rows: Max Strands in Rows are used to determine the
maximum number of strands allowed in rows. This is especially needed for
Auto Design. Functionally it restricts the number of strands to a number
which can actually be specified within a solid beam portion. This is useful
for I, L and IT sections. For example, 3*6, 2*2, 2*1 means that for the first
three rows six strands could be specified. For the next two rows only two
strands could be specified, and for the last two rows only one strand may be
placed.
a
u
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
Strand Profile: The four strand profiles available with Presto are as
follows:
1. One Point: Enables you to define a strand profile with one depress
point which is defined by A, C, and D definitions. The depress position
A can either be a fixed distance or as a percentage of member length.
The C and D definitions are optional distances. If pattern is symmetric,
D is set equal to C by the program. This pattern is shown in Figure GO34.
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-34. One Point
n
o
2. One Point Fixed: Enables you to specify straight portion on sides of the
depress position A. Definition B could be either a fixed distance or as
percentage of member length. C and D are optional distances. If Left =
Right option is set, program automatically sets D equal to C. See
Figure GO-35 for this pattern.
i
t
a
u
l
a
FIGURE GO-35. One Point Fixed
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
3. Two Point Variable: Enables you to specify the depress position A and
B as either as fix distances or as percentage of member length. You can
also specify the vertical positions for each strand at A and B depress
positions. Definition C and D are optional end distances. For symmetric
patterns, B is set equal to A, and D is set equal to C as shown in
Figure GO-36.
FIGURE GO-36. Two Point Variable
y
p
o
4. Zero Point (Straight): Strands run straight between left and right end
locations as shown in Figure GO-37.
n
o
i
t
a
u
FIGURE GO-37. Zero Point (Straight)
l
a
v
E
Right Pattern = Left Pattern: If yes is selected, then you only need to
define the strands profile. The strands profile for half are assumed symmetric
to the left half. If no is selected, then strand profiles need to be defined for
left as well as right half.
Group: Group is a number (serial) which is automatically defined by the

program assigned to various group of strands. This is not an editable field.
As you keep adding groups, the number keeps increasing.
Left Row: Row number in which the group of strands starts at the left end of
the beam. Program then internally determines height. For example, if Y-Axis
Grid Definition is 2*2, 1*3, 3*1.5 and you specify Left Row = 5, then
program interprets that strands start in 5th grid row which is at 2x2 + 1x3 +
2x1.5 = 10 inches from the bottom of the section.
Right Row: Row number in which the group of strands ends at the right end
of the beam. This field will only be available when Left strand pattern is not
symmetric with right strand pattern.

PRESTO v8.6
Left Debond: The debonded length of the strands at left end for a specific
group. This distance is measured from the left end of the beam See
Figure GO-38.
Left
Debond
Right
Debond
FIGURE GO-38. Left and Right Debond
Right Debond: The debonded length of the strands at right end for a specific
group. This distance is measured from the right end of the beam. If strands
are symmetric on left and right, then this column does not appear and right
debond is considered to be equal to left debond. See Figure GO-38.
Column List: Defines the column list in which the strands are present for
current group. For example, if Column List = 1,3-5,6 means strands are
defined to be present in columns 1,3,4,5, and 6 of the grid for current row.
Strand Id: Select any strand Id from the pull down list. Note, at this time,
PRESTO allows only one strand ID to be used for all groups.
Pull: The initial jacking force of the strand expressed as a fraction of fpu
(e.g., 0.70). Low relaxation strands are usually pulled to 0.75 and stressed
relieved strands to 0.70. Note that you can override the value loaded in from
the Prestressing Library. To permanently modify this value, select the
Prestressing Library command from the Libraries menu and modify the
appropriate strand. Refer to page GO-69 for information on using this
library.
l
a
PRESTOv8.6
n
o
i
t
a
u
v
E
y
p
o
Depress Height A: Defines the height of strand from the bottom of the
section at distance A. For straight strands this column will not be available.
For definition of A, refer to Strand Profile.
Depress Height B: Defines the height of strand from the bottom of the
section at distance B. For straight strands this column will not be available.
For definition of B, refer to Strand Profile.
Mid Debond Begin: Distance from the left end of the beam to the start of
midspan shielding. See Figure GO-39, Mid Debond, on page GO-38..
Mid Debond
End
Mid Debond
Begin
y
p
o
Mid Span Debonding
FIGURE GO-39. Mid Debond
Mid Debond End: Distance from the right end of the beam to the start of
midspan shielding. See Figure GO-39, Mid Debond, on page GO-38.
Auto Design: Clicking this button allows the program to automatically

create the strand pattern. When the ACI 318-02 design code is selected, this
design is based on the class selected in the Design Options tab located in the
Design Parameters dialog box.
Auto Debond: Clicking this button makes the program automatically

generate an optimized debonding pattern. Only straight strands will be
debonded.
v
E
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
Design Status: Clicking this button opens the Design Results screen.
PRESTO calculates the results and lists them in tabular format on the
screen. Refer to Figure GO-47, Design Results Screen, on page GO-46 for
information on using this screen
Strand Vertical Planes: The number of vertical planes for double T-Beam
may be selected from the pull down menu. Available vertical planes are
single, double, double staggered, Triple, and triple staggered.
Spacing Between Strand Vertical Planes: This dialog box allows you to
define spacing between vertical planes.
Reset Button: Clears the entire grid/table on this screen, by deleting all rows
of previously entered information.

PRESTO v8.6
Longitudinal Bars Tab

This screen allows you to specify different layers of mild reinforcement. To modify or
review the rebar pattern information, click on Longitudinal Bars tab to display this
screen as shown in Figure GO-40.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-40. Longitudinal Bars (For Sections Other Than Double Tee)
a
u
To add rebar for sections other than double tee, specify rebar, Id, distance X and Y,
Length Definition with distances, end hook conditions and position. You may add a
new row by clicking in the last row.
l
a
You may edit any information that you entered in the above screen at any time. To
delete a row, highlight the row and press the delete key. See Figure GO-40.
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-41. Longitudinal Bars (For Double Tee Sections)
i
t
To add reinforcement in a double tee section, specify quantity, Id, height from bottom,
Length Definition with distances and end hooks conditions. You may add a new row by
clicking in the last row.
a
u
You may edit any information that you entered in the above screen at any time. To
delete a row, highlight the row and press the delete key. See Figure GO-41.
Longitudinal Bars Screen Terms
l
a
v
E
Minimum Left End Clear Cover: Allows entering of Minimum clear cover
at the left end of the beam. This applies only to full length bars.
Minimum Right End Clear Cover: Allows entering of Minimum clear

cover at the right end of the beam. This applies only to full length bars.
Quantity: (Applies to Double Tee section only). The number of bars in the
current layer per web for double tee section.
For a Double Tee section:

a. if rebars are in top flange, specify total rebars in flange.
b. if rebars are in web, specify the rebars per web.
Rebar ID: Selecting the arrow to the right of the list displays the list of the
rebars currently in the Rebar Library. If a rebar is not in the list, you must add
that rebar to the library by selecting the Rebar command from the Libraries
menu.
Ht: (Applies to Double Tee section only) The height is measured from
bottom of the member. Rebar may be placed anywhere within the composite

PRESTO v8.6
section. No distinction as to whether a rebar level is in the precast or in the

topping is required. Presto automatically detects the location of the rebar
based on the assigned height and place that layer in the correct portion of the
composite section (precast or topping).
Reset Button: Clears the entire grid/table on this screen, by deleting all rows
of previously entered information.
Length Definition: Rebar could be placed with any of the five length
definitions available in the program as listed below.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-42. Two Point Variable Display
1. Full Length: Bars with full length definition do not require any of the L,
C, or D fields to be defined. However note that, when bars are defined
this way, minimum left end clear cover and minimum right end clear
cover are used to determine the actual starting and ending location of
bar.
i
t
a
u
2. Centered Length: Using this option, the user can place a rebar of
specified length L which will be centered in the length of the member.
For this case, C and D fields are not needed.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
3. Known L & C: User can specify a fixed length of rebar L which starts
at location C from the left end of the beam by using this option. The
field D is ignored in this case.
4. Known L & D: User can specify a fixed length of rebar L which ends at
a location D from the right end of the beam by using this option. The
filed C is ignored in this case.
5. Known C & D: By using this option, a user can specify a rebar which
starts at a distance C from the left end, and ends at a distance D from
right end.
Position: This defines the outer corners of a cross section where the
longitudinal bars will be placed. Every cross sections defined by PRESTO
has a bottom left corner, bottom right corner, top left corner and top right
corner. If you choose to place the bar at bottom left corner, x and y are
measured from bottom left corner, and x is positive towards right, and y is
positive up. If you choose to place the bar at top right, then x is measured
positive towards left, and y is measured positive downwards. For that reason,
X and Y may also be called as cover to bar center. Further, if you choose to
specify the position as bottom left and right, program will place two bars.
First with reference to bottom left, and another with reference to bottom
right. Finally, if you choose to use Bottom Top, Left Right, program will
place four bars at bottom left, bottom right, top left, and top right corners.
L (ft): This field is not editable for length definitions Full Length and known
C & D. For the remaining Length definitions, option allows entering of
length of bars.
C (ft): This field is available for various definitions which allows you to
specify distance from left end of the beam. Refer to Figure GO-40.
D (ft): This field is available for various definitions and when available it
allows you to specify distance from the right end of the beam. Refer to
Figure GO-40.
Hook Start/End: These fields are for end anchorage selection. The end
anchorage determines the required development length calculated as
specified by ACI or CSA code. PRESTO automatically determines if rebar
is in compression or tension and adjust the required development length
accordingly. There are three choices available, Straight, hooked and
mechanical.
y
p
o
n
o
Options to Save, Load and Save As
The top portion of the Strand and Rebar screen has buttons titled Save, Load and Save
As. PRESTO now allows you to save or load either the strand pattern (along with the
grid definitions), and/or the longitudinal rebar and/or the stirrups, rather than re-input
this frequently used information across different files. The concept supports the notion
that a user may define a strand pattern in the Strand Pattern tab and may wish to save
this information for re-use in a different file. Currently the program will allow you to
save this information as when working with any particular section type (for example, in
a hollow core slab) and allows you to reload this information for a different section
type (for example, in a flat slab).
i
t
a
u
Each time the Save button or the Load button is clicked, PRESTO displays the dialog
shown below, and allows you to set the specific parameters to be saved or loaded. You
can choose to save only the strand patterns and the stirrups, and choose to ignore the
longitudinal rebars. All of the information is saved in a file called pattern.spf. To
delete certain predefined elements, you can edit the information in this file by directly
editing it in Note Pad.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-43. Save Components dialog

PRESTO v8.6
Stem Stirrups Tab

This screen allows you to define shear reinforcement in the webs/stems of members.
To input, modify or review the stem stirrup reinforcement information, click on the
Stem Stirrups tab to display this screen as show in Fig. GO-43 and edit the information
accordingly.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-44. Stem Stirrups (Shear Reinforcement)
a
u
The top portion of this tab shows the definition views for both the elevation and section
view of the stirrups. The details such as the stirrup parametrics (dimensions C1, C2,
C3, C4, etc.) are necessary only when importing from BIM software such as Tekla
Structures, and will be available within PRESTO only when working with such
software. Alternatively, you can use the Auto Design button and let PRESTO generate
a stirrup schedule automatically, based on the parameters selected in the dialog as
shown below. After either inputting a stirrup pattern manually or generating a stirrup
pattern using the auto generate feature, you can check the design status to make sure
that area of shear steel provided is sufficient.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
FIGURE GO-45. Design Stirrups Form
y
p
o
Note: For Double-Tee beams, the information specified on this screen is per web
and is automatically duplicated by the program to the other web.
Stem Stirrups Tab Screen Terms
Left Offset: Distance from the reference edge to the first stirrup.
Right Offset: Distance from the right face of beam to the first stirrup.
Stirrups: Number of stirrups. For Double-Tee this number represents the

number of bars in one web.
ID: Rebar ID. Selecting the arrow to the right of the list displays the list of
the rebars currently in the Rebar Library. If a rebar is not in the list, you must
add that rebar to the library by selecting the Rebar command from the
Libraries menu.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
n
o
Spacing: Centre-to-centre spacing of the stirrups for the selected group.
End Beam: Specify the reference edge of the beam for the selected group.
Can be either left or right or both. When the option for both is selected,
program will place the stirrups in two separate groups symmetrically from
both ends.
Paired: This is to accommodate the industry practice of using the same size
bar, but effectively doubling the area of shear reinforcement by the use of
double stirrups (or paired stirrups).
Type: Select from the drop-down list showing different configurations (90
degree closed, 135 degree closed, open U, etc.). This selection will not make
a difference in the analysis, but is used primarily for the data exchange with
BIM software such as Tekla Structures.

PRESTO v8.6
Stem Mesh Tab

This screen allows you to define commonly used welded wire mesh reinforcement in
the webs of members rather than specifying vertical shear reinforcement. PRESTO
currently only considers the contribution of the vertical bars of the mesh towards the
vertical shear reinforcement provided. To input, modify or review the stem mesh
reinforcement information, click on the Stem Mesh tab to display the screen as show in
Figure GO-46 and edit the information accordingly.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
FIGURE GO-46. Stem Mesh Tab
Note: For double-Tee beams, the information entered on this tab is per web and
is automatically duplicated by the program to the other web.
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Note: Currently PRESTO version 8.6 does not support the transfer of stem
mesh data in or out to BIM software such as Tekla Structures. Future version
will support this information exchange.
Stem Mesh Tab Screen Terms
Top Clearance: Distance of the top most longitudinal bar of the stem mesh
measured from the top of the beam. Not used for engineering calculations;
only for representation in drawings.
Bottom Clearance: Distance of the lowest longitudinal bar of the stem

mesh measured from the bottom of the beam. Not used for engineering
calcuations; only for representation in drawings.
Design Results Screen
Vertical Bar ID: Rebar ID for specifying the vertical bars of the mesh.
Selecting the arrow to the right of the list displays the list of rebars currently
in the Rebar library. If a rebar is not in the list, you must add that rebar to the
library by selecting the Rebar Command from the libraries menu.
Vertical Bar Spacing: Center to center spacing of the vertical bars on the
welded wire reinforcement mesh.
Start: The dstance from the left end of beam to the first vertical bar of the
mesh.
End: The distance from the left end of beam to the last vertical bar of the
mesh.
y
p
o
Clicking the Design Status button on the Design tab, or on the Strand and Rebar dialog
will instantaneously have the program calculate and list the results in tabular format.
The table shows a summary of stresses, ultimate moment calculations, shear design,
and camber and deflection results for the beam using the currently entered number of
strands and rebar. Quantities that have exceeded the limiting stress values or do not
provide sufficient strength are marked with asterisks for quick identification. Use the
Stage drop-down list to see the results for service checks or ultimate strength.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-47. Design Results Screen
You can print the results by clicking the Print button. Click the Cancel button to close
this screen and return to the Design tab or click the X in the top right corner of the
screen.

PRESTO v8.6
Drawing Print Dialog Box
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-48. Enhanced Report View
The standard report view is a simple text file. However, the enhanced report view is a
HTML file with enhanced functionality. It shows any violations not only with an
asterisk but also in red color for the text, and highlighted with yellow color to bring
your attention to the problem area. The enhanced report can be saved by clicking on
Save As. Other options include Page Setup, Print Preview and Print. Figure GO-48
shows a sample enhanced report dialog.
a
u
i
t
Drawing Print Dialog Box
PRESTO allows you to print the drawing displayed in the Design tab. Click the
Drawing button on the Design tab to open the Drawing Print dialog box. Select from
the options to Print c/s (cross section) or Print Elevation or Export to AutoCad DXF
file option. Click the OK button to accept the choice. When the Print options are
selected, the program will first show the image in an enhanced report viewer format;
from there you can choose to print, print/preview or even save as an HTML file with
embedded images.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-49. Drawing Print Dialog Box
PRESTOv8.6
Using PRESTO from Within Tekla Structures
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-50. Sample Output Showing C/S
a
u

PRESTO can design and/or check prestressed precast beams defined and detailed in
Tekla Structures. PRESTO in this operation provides design or check of rectangular,
inverted tee, ledge and double tee sections.
l
a
PRESTO works in two modes when activated from within Tekla Structures:
v
E
1.
Design Mode: If there is no reinforcement present in the beam, you can

design the beams in PRESTO and then transfer reinforcement back into
Tekla Structures.
2.
Check Mode: If you have already detailed a beam and want to check its
adequacy, you can transfer the member and reinforcement data from Tekla
Structures to PRESTO and then check if it satisfies all the design checks per
selected code. In this process, if you revise the reinforcement, that will be
updated back in the Tekla Structures beam.
If a design check of any beams by PRESTO is desired from within Tekla Structures,
you should first detail the section using macro plug-in number 51, 52, 53, or 54. Refer

PRESTO v8.6
to Figure GO-51 to view tool bar for plug-in icons located on the right side of the Tekla
Structures with Beam Plug-ins Icons screen.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-51. Tekla Structures with Beam Plug-in Icons
i
t
In order for you to use PRESTO from within Tekla Structures, you need concrete
detailing versions of Tekla Structures. Note, you also need to install PRESTO
components to work with Tekla Structures during installation process. Refer to
Figure GS-6 for more information on installation of PRESTO for Tekla Structures.
To design a beam in PRESTO from within Tekla Structures, perform the following
steps:
a
u
1.
Detail a beam with beam plug-ins number 51, 52, 53, or 54.
2.
Scroll plug-ins page by using directional arrows until PRESTO icon

displays as shown in Figure GO-52.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-52. Tekla Structures with PRESTO Plug-in Icon
3.
Click the PRESTO icon.
4.
Select the beam you want to design (select only one beam).
i
t
PRESTO will start and display beam length, cross-section type,
topping data, flange opening information and cross-section

dimensions as passed from Tekla Structures for the selected
member..
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-53. Member Info Tab when PRESTO is Called from Tekla
Structures

PRESTO v8.6
Note: Certain items in PRESTO are not enabled for editing purposes when
called from within Tekla Structures.This ensures that data integrity remains
intact. For this reason when PRESTO is activated from within Tekla Structures,
the File menu, Open and New selections are disabled. In addition, on the Member
Info tab, beam length, beam cross-section type and beam ID are also
unavailable.
5.
y
p
o
To verify section/beam data has transferred from Tekla Structures, click the
Show Image button as sown below in Figure GO-54.
n
o
i
t
a
u
FIGURE GO-54. Double Tee Beam Information Passed from Tekla Structures
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
6.
If you wish to view section details, click the Libraries: Beam Sections, and
select beam type passed from Tekla Structures. Section ID displays for beam
name. Refer to Figure GO-55.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-55. Section Details for the Section Passed from Tekla
Structures
7.
Upon verification of section/beam data, you can modify any other data items
on the Member Info tab. Refer to GO-3 for more information.
8.
Once geometry is verified, switch to the Materials tab to edit information for
beam material data. Refer to page GO-8 for more information on using the
Materials tab.
i
t
a
u
9.
Access the Load tab to define loads.
10. Access the Analysis tab and execute required analysis for section/beam data.
Refer to page GO-13 for more information on the Analysis tab.
l
a
v
E
11. Access the Design tab and review design parameters.Then access the Strand
and Rebar dialog. Check design status and make revisions to the strand,
longitudinal bar and stirrup information. Refer to page GO-16 regarding the
Design tab.
Note that you will see the strand ID defined in the Tekla catalog.
For strand, select the strand ID. For rebar, select the rebar ID
correctly based on steel type and strength. Refer to page GO-30 for
information on using the Strand and Rebar dialog.

PRESTO v8.6
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-56. Strand and Rebar Tab for Double Tee Section
12. After you finalize the strand and rebar pattern, close the program by
selecting File exit. At this point, PRESTO will ask you if you want to update
the pattern in Tekla Structures. Select Yes to update, or no to discard the
pattern.
n
o
i
t
At this time, if you selected Yes, beam information is updated in beam as per PRESTO
Design. Any other steel information remains unchanged.
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
FIGURE GO-57. Update Strand/Rebar Pattern for Beam in Tekla Structures
Program Menu Commands
Program Menu Commands

PRESTO comes with a large collection of timesaving commands and functions. Please
make yourself familiar with these features in order to maximize your ability to take
advantage of PRESTOs many features.
y
p
o
File Menu
File | New
This command clears the workspace and prepares PRESTO for a new project. If there
is a file with new data in the workspace when you select the New command, a warning
message appears and asks if any current changes in the file are to be saved. Selecting
Yes will save the existing data. You must supply a file name of your choice, if the file
was not previously saved.
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-58. File | New
File | Open
a
u
This command opens a previously saved file. The Open dialog box contains the
standard Windows file open functions. You can browse through drives, directories, and
files. Select by double-clicking the directory or the file name of your choice. Clicking
Cancel closes the screen without opening any files.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-59. File | Open

PRESTO v8.6
File Menu
If there is existing data in the workspace when you select the Open command, a
message appears and asks if you would like to save your latest changes to the existing
file in the workspace. Click Yes to save the data. Supply a file name of your choice if
requested. Click No to open the data without saving current data.
If you are an existing user, you can import your old data files (*.prt) from a previous
version of the program and old DOS data files (*.prs) from version 7.x. To select a file
type, click the arrow to the right of the Files of Type drop-down list. You will see a list of
the available file types. Click the type you want.
y
p
o
File | Save
This command saves the existing project using the current name. No warnings will be
issued from this command. This command is useful for quickly saving intermediate
steps during a work session.
If the data is not saved using the Save As command first, the file will not have a
specified name and the Save command will (by default) name the file UNTITLED.prt.
In this case, the user will be asked for a file name to save the data under a different
name.
n
o
File | Save As
The Save As command allows you to rename a project file and save it under a new
name. The previous data file will be retained under the original name.
i
t
File Menu
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-60. File | Save As
You can save the file by selecting the appropriate drive and directory and then entering
a file name. Select Save to save the file under the new name. Select Cancel to cancel
the file saving and return to the program.
File | Save Setting

The Save Setting command allows you to save current data as default data, and is
especially useful when performing repetitious designs with only a small amount of
input variation. This command will save the current member and material information
and the next time the program is started or File | New is selected, these previously saved
PRESTOv8.6
File Menu
settings will exist as defaults. These values are stored in a default file specified under
the Show | Preferences option. For multiple projects, you can have multiple setting files
created and then select the desired setting using the Show | Preferences option.
File | Print
The Print command allows the printing of project data and the result summary, as
shown in the following figure. The user can choose to view the results on-screen, send
it to the printer, or print to a file. Also, the user can select specific parts of the results or
input data to print.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-61. File | Print
a
u
Checking the option for Enhanced Report will produce the output in the HTML format
as shown in Figure GO-48.
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
File Menu
File | Print Setup

Selecting the Print Setup command opens the Print Setup screen. The options presented
in this screen can be changed to recognize the printers installed in the operating system.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-62. File | Print Setup
i
t
Different printers or plotters can be selected from this screen. Once the output device is
selected, the Properties option can be used to configure the selected output device. A
typical setup for a HP LaserJet printer is illustrated.
a
u
For detailed information about configuring printers or plotters, refer to the appropriate
documentation for your printer.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
File | Security
The Security command opens the LEAP Software Security screen. This screen gives the
user access to PRESTOs built-in electronic security. Here, you can transfer
authorization to different directories or computers, and also kill an existing license.
One valuable feature on this screen is the Security Dir. tab. This option allows the user
to install the program on a local computer but use the security from another directory,
usually from a network. Selecting this option allows you to have multiple users,
without diminishing server or network speed. For detailed information about LEAP
Software Security, please refer to the Getting Started chapter.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-63. File | Security
a
u
File | Exit
The Exit command exits PRESTO. If there is any data not saved, the program displays
a message asking if you want to save before exiting.
l
a
v
E
GO-58 /
PRESTO v8.6
Show Menu
Show Menu
Show | Image
Selecting the Image command from the Show menu or selecting its respective icon
opens the Image screen as shown below.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-64. Show | Image
A three-dimensional image of the member, along with any topping, flange openings, or
support conditions is displayed in this screen. This image can be seen after the input
data for the Member Info tab is completed. The control buttons on the left side of the
Image screen are explained below.
a
u
Image Button Summaries
l
a
Rotate. This button allows you to rotate the view. After selecting this icon, you must
simply bring the mouse pointer anywhere within the image area. Hold down the left
mouse button while dragging the pointer. The image regenerates as you move the
pointer.
v
E
Zoom-In. This button allows you to zoom in on a part of the image. After clicking this
icon, you must select the area to enlarge by holding down the left mouse button, and
then dragging the pointer over the part to be enlarged. While dragging the mouse
pointer, a selection will be defined. Release of the button completes the task, and the
selected part of the image appears magnified.
Zoom-Out. This button allows you to zoom out. As with the zoom-in feature, select an
area to zoom out of by holding down the left mouse button, and then dragging the
pointer over the part to be reduced. Release of the button completes the task, and the
selected part of the image appears reduced.
Pan. This button allows you to pan the image. After selecting this button, you can then
place the pointer anywhere in the image, hold down the left mouse button, and then
drag the pointer in order to pan the view.
PRESTOv8.6
/ GO-59
Show Menu
Reset. This button allows you to reset the image. If you have zoomed-in on a part of
the image, for example, clicking this button restores the image to its original size and
location.
Print. This button allows you to print the image. Selecting this button sends the view
to the default printer. Note, however, that PRESTO prints in a WYSIWYG format.
That is, if the image appears zoomed-in on your monitor, then it prints as shown on
the monitor, enlarged.
y
p
o
Front View. This button allows you to view the image from the front. By default, this
screen opens to a side view of the section. Clicking this button rotates the image 90
degrees.
Show | Model
Selecting the Model command from the Show menu or selecting its respective icon
opens the Model screen.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-65. Show | Model
The FEM model generated internally for the analysis appears in this screen. To view
the node and/or member numbers, select the appropriate check boxes on the top part of
this screen. The control buttons located on the left of this screen perform the same
actions as described in the Image Button Summaries located on page GO-59.
Show | Results
This menu command displays the results in tabular format, and is accessible by
selecting the Results command from the Show menu or by its respective icon. After
selecting this menu item, you may view specific beam design results.
GO-60 /
PRESTO v8.6
Show Menu
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-66. Show | Results
n
o
The results available can be selected, from either Service or Ultimate stage, from the
Type drop-down list. Any of the results displayed on this screen can be printed
individually by selecting the Print button. If this button is selected, the printout will be
sent to the default printer without any other prompt. To close the Results screen, click
the X located at the top right hand corner of the results display.
i
t
Show | Diagrams
This menu command displays the results in graphical format and is accessible from the
Show menu or selecting its respective icon. After selecting this menu item, the display
requires you to select specific information from the Stage, Case, Type, and Factor dropdown lists to view the graphics. After the analysis is complete, Moment and Shear
diagrams are available. Stress results in graphical format are only available after either
rebar or strands have been specified by selecting the Design option.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-67. Show | Diagram
PRESTOv8.6
/ GO-61
Libraries Menu
Any of the diagrams displayed on this screen can be printed individually by selecting
the Print button. If this button is selected, the printout will be sent to the default printer
without any other prompt.
NOTE: PRESTO prints in a WYSIWYG format. That is, the image prints exactly as
shown on the monitor.
y
p
o
Show | Preferences
Selecting the Preferences command from the Show menu opens the Preferences dialog
box. Here, the user can specify a default file name and default directory. Any
previously saved settings will be stored in this specified default file, such as member
and material information. For more information on saving settings, see File | Save
Setting on page GO-55. The default directory is the location where your data files and
libraries are saved automatically.
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-68. Show | Preferences
The Enhanced Design Status option allows you to choose the format of the reports
showing the Design Status screen.
a
u
The option Auto Run analysis if needed by Design Tab page allows you to directly skip
over to the Design tab once the geometry information is complete, instead of explictly
clicking the Run Analysis button the Analysis tab.
l
a
Libraries Menu
v
E
Commonly used data is grouped in PRESTO in the form of Libraries. Libraries are
used to store data that does not change often and is to be used repeatedly across
projects. The three library types used in PRESTO are Beam Sections, Prestressing
Tendons, and Rebar, all of which store information as suggested by their titles.
Each library type can contain a number of different files (for example, section files can
be named default.pr1, LEAP.pr1 etc.) and each file can have a number of items (for
example STANDARD-I, STANDARD-II etc.).
PRESTO includes a set of default libraries namely default.pr1, default.pr2 and
default.pr3. Most users may find it convenient to work with a single file for each
library type, modifying, adding and deleting items in these files rather than creating
and setting up different library files for the same library type.
GO-62 /
PRESTO v8.6
Libraries Menu
Libraries | Setup
The Setup command opens the Library Setup dialog box. Here, the user can select the
specific library files to be used as program defaults, for each of the three library types
(Beam Sections, Prestressing, and Rebar). Once the libraries have been set up in this
screen, PRESTO keeps the library setup selections in the computer registry, and the
next time the program is started, it automatically loads the appropriate files.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE GO-69. Libraries | Setup
Different library files can be created for the different library types from the Libraries |
Beam Sections, Libraries | Prestressing, and Libraries | Rebar menus, as explained in the
following sections.
i
t
Libraries | Beam Sections
a
u
This command is used to access Beam entries in the library file currently loaded. To
view the contents of this library, select Beam Sections from the Libraries menu or from
its respective icon. The sections listed upon opening this screen correspond to the
currently loaded section library file (*.pr1) selected under Libraries | Setup. To load a
different library file, you must use the Libraries | Setup menu.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-70. Libraries | Beam Sections
PRESTOv8.6
/ GO-63
Libraries Menu
Note that a list of predefined section types appear on the left of the Beam Sections
Library. These sections are standard sections, and although you cannot add a new type,
you can add to or modify an item in the list. The beam types are used by the program to
automatically identify various specific design and code criteria.
To add or modify an item, highlight the section type from the list on the Beam Sections
Library and click the Add button. When the appropriate Section Detail dialog box
appears, fill in the data for ID, Description, and dimensions. Note that each item ID must
be unique (i.e., you cannot have two double-T beams with an ID of 12DT24).
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
FIGURE GO-71. Section Detail Dialog Box (Double Tee)
l
a
v
E
Notice the three options under Section Properties: User Input, Dimensions, and Drawing.
You can enter your own values for center of gravity, area, moment of inertia and vol/
area by selecting the User Input option. For hollow cores, this option also allows users
to specify the top and bottom flange thickness and web thickness to be used in design
calculations. If you select the Dimensions option, the program calculates the section
properties based on the section dimensions entered above. (Note that the fields under
Section Properties will be unavailable.) The third option, Drawing, allows you to draw
your own beam section, as explained in the following section. In this case, the program
computes the section properties based on the drawing. Note that, in any case, the user
must enter some dimensions, regardless of the option selected for computing section
properties. These dimensions are used for various engineering calculations by the
program. To better understand this feature, we recommend experimenting using all
three options offered. You will quickly observe the differences between each option.
The Volume/Surface Area ratio is used in the computation of losses and is computed as
the ratio of the cross sectional area of the member divided by the perimeter of the
beam.
GO-64 /
PRESTO v8.6
Libraries Menu
Drawing the Beam Section

Click the Edit button on the Section Detail dialog box to open the Section Drawing
screen, as shown below. Use the control buttons on the left of the screen to define your
own beam section. If you move the mouse over these control buttons, a description of
the button displays in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE GO-72. Section Drawing Screen
a
u
The control buttons on the left side of the Section Drawing screen are explained below.
Return and Update. This button accepts the section drawing and returns to the Section
Detail dialog box.
l
a
v
E
Drawing Properties Settings. This button allows you to edit the drawing limits, grid
and snap settings. This button opens the Drawing Properties dialog box. Enter the
desired information and click the OK button.
Add New Polygon. This button starts the mode to draw polygons composed of straight
lines. Click the left mouse button to add sides; a node will appear. Right-click on the
last node to close the drawing.
Add New Circle. This button allows you to add a circle to your drawing. First, click
the location where you want the center of the circle. Move the mouse until the desired
circular radius is reached and click again. The Circular Section dialog box displays;
modify the values if desired and click the OK button. The circle will be added to the
drawing. If a circle is drawn completely inside another polygon, then it is treated as a
cut-out (or hollow).
Add Nodes. This button allows you to add nodes to the polygon. When you click this
button, all the nodes that comprise the polygon and circles become visible. To add
PRESTOv8.6
/ GO-65
Libraries Menu
additional nodes, click anywhere on any polygon edge (between two nodes). Note that
to add a new point between two existing points, both existing points must be visible on
the screen. You can zoom in, zoom out, or expand the size of the drawing editor
window. To add a node between existing nodes, make sure you can see both nodes on
the screen.
y
p
o
Delete Nodes. This button allows you to delete a node on the polygon or entire circle.
Selecting this button displays all the composing nodes. Click any node on the polygon
to delete that node. Click any node on the circle to delete the entire circle.
Modify Nodes. Click this button to modify the shape of the polygon. Clicking this
button displays all the composing nodes for the polygon. To move a node, drag any
node to another location. Click on a node and move the mouse without releasing the
mouse button. Move to desired location and release the left mouse button.
Show Vertex. Click this button to display a list of vertices in a tabular format. You can
modify the X and Y coordinate values for any node if desired.
Fillet. Selecting this button displays all the nodes that compose the polygon and
circles. If you click any node in the corner of the polygon, a dialog box displays that
allows you to select if the fillet is Chamfer or Fillet. You can also edit the fillet
dimensions in this dialog box. Click the OK button to accept any changes and return to
the drawing.
n
o
i
t
Zoom-In. This button allows you to zoom in on a part of the drawing. After clicking
this button, you must select the area to enlarge by holding down the left mouse button,
and then dragging the pointer over the part to be enlarged. While dragging the mouse
pointer, a selection will be defined. Release of the button completes the task, and the
selected part of the image appears magnified.
a
u
Zoom-Out. This button allows you to zoom out. As with the zoom-in feature, select an
area to zoom out of by holding down the left mouse button, and then dragging the
pointer over the part to be reduced. Release of the button completes the task, and the
selected part of the image appears reduced.
l
a
Pan. This button allows you to pan the image. After selecting this button, you can then
place the pointer anywhere in the image, hold down the left mouse button, and then
drag the pointer in order to pan the view.
v
E
First, click the Drawing Properties button to specify the type of grid, spacing, and
color, drawing limits, and snap dimensions. This opens the Drawing Properties dialog
box.
GO-66 /
PRESTO v8.6
Libraries Menu
FIGURE GO-73. Drawing Properties Dialog Box
y
p
o
For example, if the grid has 25 units in the X direction and 25 units in the Y direction,
enter 25 in the X and Y fields under Grids. Select the Active check box. You can also
specify the type of gridline and color you want. Next, if the overall size of the section is
500in 600in, the drawing limits in the X direction are (-250, 250) and in the Y
direction, (0,600). Therefore, enter 250 in the Min X field and 250 in the Max X
field and enter 0 in the Min Y field and 600 in the Max Y field. Under Snap, select a
useful snap spacing. Generally this number is a small common denominator of the
drawing dimensions. For this example, the snap spacing is 10in. Enter 10 in the X
and Y field and select the Active check box. Click the OK button and return to the
Drawing Properties dialog box. Notice that the grid with your grid selections will be
displayed in the drawing area.
n
o
i
t
a
u
Now you can start to draw the section beam. Select the Add New Polygon button.
Move the cursor inside the drawing area and click the left mouse button to click the
starting point. This will be the first node. Although any starting point can be selected,
do not select a starting point that will force the drawing outside the drawing limits.
Move the mouse across to the next location and click again. This creates the first edge
of the section (and also the second point). Next, move to the third point and click to
create the second edge. Repeat this until all points and edges have been entered and the
drawing is complete. Right-click on the last node to close the drawing; it will fill in the
drawing with color. To show the nodes on the drawing, click the Add Nodes button.
Note that to be able to add a new point between two existing points, both existing
points must be visible on the screen. You can zoom in or zoom out or expand the size of
the drawing editor window.
l
a
v
E
You can insert a circle in your drawing by clicking the Add New Circle button. Move
the cursor to where you want the center of the circle and click the left mouse button.
Move the mouse until the desired circular radius is reached and click the left mouse
button again. The Circular Section dialog box displays. Modify the values if desired
and click the OK button to return to the Section Drawing screen. The drawing will be
changed to show the circle you just created.
PRESTOv8.6
/ GO-67
Libraries Menu
y
p
o
FIGURE GO-74. Circular Section Dialog Box
When you have completed your drawing, click the Return and Update button to
return to the Section Detail dialog box.
Click the Template button to open the Template dialog box, as shown below. This
screen shows all possible locations where strands may be placed. Enter the values for
height and the maximum number of strands allowed at that height. The height of the
strands is measured from the bottom at the end of the beam. Remember that you are not
entering the strand pattern here, but only the possible locations where strands may be
located, used by the program in the auto-strand generation module in the Strand
Pattern dialog box. It might help to visualize this template as the end beam template
used in the casting yard by the fabricator to place the prestressing tendons.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-75. Template Dialog Box
The program can also generate the Strand template automatically, by clicking Auto
Generate button in the Template dialog box to open the Template Auto Generation
dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
GO-68 /
PRESTO v8.6
Libraries Menu
FIGURE GO-76. Template Auto Generation Dialog Box
n
o
y
p
o
NOTE: If the template data already displays on the Template dialog box, then clicking
the Auto Generate button will lead to the appearance of a warning message,
Existing template will be erased. Do you wish to continue? Selecting Yes will result
in the deletion of any existing template data and enable the user to enter a few key
parameters in the Template Auto Generation dialog box. To prevent this message from
appearing, click the Clear All button prior to the Auto Generate button.
i
t
In the Template Auto Generation dialog box, four parameters to be entered are: Distance
from bottom to the first Row, Distance between Rows, Min. distance from the last Row to top,
and Number of strands per Row. After entering the data for these four parameters, click
the Generate button to perform the template generation. After the template
automatically generates, the data can still be edited on the Template dialog box by
using the Add, Delete, and Modify buttons.
a
u
Click the OK button to close the Template dialog box and return to the Section Detail
dialog box.
l
a
v
E
When you are satisfied with the section data, click the OK button and return to the
Beam Sections Library. Notice that the ID and Description for the section you created
appears in the Items list. Click the Save button to save the newly created section in the
currently loaded library (or you can also save it under a different name by selecting
Save As). At this stage you will get a message informing you that the beam section has
been saved to the library. To modify an existing item in the list, highlight it and click
the Modify button to edit the values. To delete existing items, highlight the item in the
list and click the Delete button.
Now that the section file has been saved, click the Close button to close the screen and
end this procedure.
Libraries | Prestressing
This menu command is used to access the strand values in the library file. To view the
contents of this library, select Prestressing from the Libraries menu or its corresponding
icon, and the Prestressing Tendon Library displays. The strands listed upon opening
PRESTOv8.6
/ GO-69
Libraries Menu
this menu correspond to the currently loaded strand library file (*.pr2) selected under
the Libraries | Setup option. To load a different library file, you must use the Libraries |
Setup option.
FIGURE GO-77. Libraries | Prestressing
n
o
y
p
o
PRESTO is released with a set of predefined tendon IDs. To add a tendon to a library,
select a tendon ID from the ID drop-down list, or type in a new ID, a type from the Type
drop-down list (Stress Relieved or Low Relaxation), and enter the values for specified
tensile strength (fpu) of prestressing steel, the Jacking multiplier, the modulus of
elasticity (ES), and the diameter (d). PRESTO automatically calculates the strand area;
however, you can edit this value. Click the Add button to add the tendon to the list. To
save the newly created section in the currently loaded library, click the Save button.
Click the Save As button if you want to save it under a different library file. A message
will display verifying that the tendon has been saved to the library. Once the
prestressing tendon file has been saved, click the Close button to close the screen and
end this procedure.
i
t
a
u
You can modify a specific item by highlighting it in the list, making the appropriate
changes, and clicking the Modify button. To delete existing items, highlight the item(s)
in the list and click the Delete button.
l
a
Libraries | Rebar
v
E
The Rebar command is used to access the reinforcement values in the library file. To
view the contents of this library, select the Rebar command from the Libraries menu or
its corresponding icon. The reinforcement listed upon opening this screen corresponds
to the currently loaded reinforcement bar library file (*.pr3) selected under Libraries |
Setup.
GO-70 /
PRESTO v8.6
Libraries Menu
FIGURE GO-78. Libraries | Rebar
n
o
Libraries | Convert from v. 7
y
p
o
This menu item allows you to convert the section libraries from earlier versions of
PRESTO (v7.1 or higher) into a version 8.x format. Select the Convert option from the
Libraries menu to open the Convert Libraries from v.7 dialog box, as shown below.
Click the Browse button to locate the path and file names, or type in the desired path
and file name in the text boxes and then click the Convert button. After the library is
converted, you can select to use it by following the procedures outlined in Libraries |
Setup section.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE GO-79. Libraries | Convert from v.7
PRESTOv8.6
/ GO-71
Help Menu
Help Menu
Help | Contents
This menu item opens the Help file, which lists the items contained in PRESTO
Online Help. You may select an item to display the information associated with that
item.
y
p
o
Help | User Manual
This menu item opens PRESTOs User Manual in pdf format. You must have Adobe
Reader installed on your system.
Help | Search for Help on
This menu item opens PRESTOs Help search engine. You simply type in the topic(s)
to search for information on, and the Help program will compile a listing of the
matches it finds. Selecting an item displays the associated information.
Help | How to Use Help
n
o
This menu item gives you some general information and tips on how to use PRESTOs
Online Help.
i
t
Help | Visit LEAP Web Site
If you have Internet access, selecting this menu item open the dial-up feature, loads
your browser, and directs you to LEAPs Web site. Check this site frequently for
important program updates, news, technical support questions, and more.
a
u
Help | About PRESTO
This menu item lists the general information, a disclaimer on the PRESTO program,
as well as the computers physical memory.
l
a
Help | Tech Support
This menu items shows you helpful information regarding LEAP technical support.
Help | Check for Updates
v
E
This menu item allows you to check (via the Internet) if a new version of the software
is available.
GO-72 /
PRESTO v8.6
CHAPTER FOUR
Tutorial Session
y
p
o
This chapter consists of a tutorial introduction for PRESTO. This tutorial is

designed to familiarize users with PRESTOs capabilities through a handson approach. This tutorial takes you through the entire design session, screen
by screen, demonstrating the basic operation of the program. To assist you in
completing this tutorial, we have included the output generated by the
program.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
T-1
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
T-2 / Tutorial Session

PRESTO v8.6
TUTORIAL SESSION
Design of a 8DT24 Double Tee
y
p
o
This tutorial takes you through a typical start-to-finish prestressed beam

design, step-by-step. In this tutorial, We recommend that you run this tutorial
problem before starting a design of your own. We will be using a standard PCI
8DT24 double tee.
n
o
The information for this tutorial is contained in an input file called

Tutor1.prt. As an alternative to entering all the information from scratch, as
directed in this tutorial, you can load this file and only work on the sections
you wish. To load this file, select the Open command from the File menu.
Browse to the PRESTO/Examples subdirectory, if it is not already showing,
and select the file Tutor1.prt.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
T-3
Problem Data
SD , LL
0 .5 "
y
p
o
.5 "
50'
n
o
3.75"
2 @ 16"
2 @ 14"
2 @ 4"
2 @ 2"
a
u
E n d P a tte rn
l
a
Problem Data
Concrete
v
E
i
t
2
2
2
2
@
@
@
@
24"
26"
2"
2"
96"
5.75"
3 .5 "
3"
2 .5 "
2"
M id P a t t e r n
FIGURE T-1. Strand Pattern
Unit Weight
150 pcf
f'c
5500 psi
f'ci
4500 psi
Unit Weight
150 pcf
f'c
3000 psi
Topping
T-4 /
PRESTO v8.6
Step 1: Start of Tutorial
Thickness
From 0 to 14
2 in
From 20.5 to 50
2 in
Type
Low relaxation
fpu
270 ksi
Pull
75%
Profile
1 pt depressed
Strand
Opening Data
Rectangular: 1' 2', @ 15' from left end + 1' offset
Circular: 2' diameter, @ 20' from left end - 1' offset
n
o
Loads
Dead Load
y
p
o
10 psf
i
t
Live Load
Step 1: Start of Tutorial
50 psf
Start PRESTO as you would any other application using Microsoft Windows.
By default, the program installs in Programs > LEAP Software > PRESTO.
To open, click the Start button, select Programs, then LEAP Software, and
then select PRESTO.
a
u
l
a
When PRESTO splash screen appears, click the START button to clear the
screen and view the Project tab.
v
E
FIGURE T-2. PRESTO Splash Screen
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-5
Step 2: Complete the Project Information
Step 2: Complete the Project Information

The Project tab allows you to enter general information about the project. You
can return to this tab at any time and make changes.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE T-3. Project Tab
i
t
Enter in the general information in the text boxes, as shown in the figure
above. Select US (English) under Units and Prestressed (w or w/o rebar) under
Design Options and select the Design Code as ACI 318-99.
Step 3: Define the Member Information
a
u
Click the Member Info tab to access the appropriate screen. Enter 50 in the
Length field and select Double Tee from the Beam Type drop-down list, as shown
in the figure below.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-4. Member Info Tab
T-6 /
PRESTO v8.6
For this tutorial, you want to use the section 8DT24; however, this is not
available in the Section ID drop-down list. You will need to add this section to
the library, as follows.
Beam Sections Library

Select the Beam Sections option from Libraries menu. The Beam Sections
Library displays, as shown in the figure below. Highlight Double Tee under
Type and click the Add button.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE T-5. Beam Sections Library
i
t
Section Detail Dialog Box
When the Section Detail dialog box displays, enter the values as shown below.
Under Calculation based on, select the Dimensions option. This allows the
program to automatically calculate the section properties based on the
dimensions of the cross-section specified above. Notice that the text boxes
under Section Properties become unavailable.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-6. Section Detail Dialog Box (Double Tee)
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-7
Template Dialog Box

Click the Template button to activate the Template dialog box, as shown in the
following figure. Enter 2 in the Height field and 2 in the # of Strands field
(for maximum number of strands at that height). Click the Add button. It will
appear in the list on the screen. Repeat this for the remaining strands. Click the
OK button when finished.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE T-7. Template Dialog Box
i
t
Beam Sections Library
Click the OK button again to return to the Beam Sections Library. Notice that
the section 8DT24 appears in the list under Items, as shown below. Click the
Save button to save the section to the library. A message will display
confirming that the section has been saved to the library; click the OK button to
close this window. Click the Close button to exit the Beam Sections Library
and return to the Member Info tab.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-8. Beam Sections Library (Showing New Section 8DT24)
Member Info Tab

Now you can select 8DT24 from the Section ID drop-down list. Continue
entering the rest of the data, as shown in the following figure. To define the
T-8 /
PRESTO v8.6
topping, enter 2 in the Thickness field and 14 in the Length field. Click the
Add button and it will appear in the list under Topping. Repeat this for the
remaining two topping sections. Also change the Final Support locations to be
0.5 ft from each end. Enter 96 in the Topping Slab Width field (the same as
the top flange width of the Double Tee).
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
FIGURE T-9. Member Info Tab
Now, click the Flange Opening button to activate the Opening Data dialog
box, as shown in the following figure.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-10. Opening Data Dialog Box
Here, you will define one rectangular opening and one circular opening, as
follows. Select Rectangular from the Opening Type drop-down list. Then, enter
1 in the bo field, 2 in the lo field, 15 in the f1 field, and 1 in the f2 field.
Click the Add button. Notice that it will appear in the list. Repeat the above
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-9
steps to define the circular opening as shown in the figure. Click the OK button
and return to the Member Info tab.
Image Screen
Select Image from the Show menu to activate the Image screen. You will see a
3-D image of the structure, as shown below. Use the buttons on the left side of
the screen to manipulate your view of the image. Experiment with the buttons
to become familiar with their functions. Once you have become familiar with
this screen, close or minimize the screen to return to the Member Info tab. Note
that on any screen in the program, you can press F1 to get context-sensitive
help.
y
p
o
NOTE: You will need to use the Rotate button in order to see the view shown
here.
n
o
i
t
a
u
FIGURE T-11. Show | Image
l
a
v
E
T-10 /
PRESTO v8.6
Step 4: Define the Material Properties
Step 4: Define the Material Properties

Click the Materials tab to activate the appropriate screen. Select 1/2-270K-LL
from the Prestressing Tendon ID drop-down list and enter 0.75 in the Initial
jacking coefficient field.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE T-12. Materials Tab
i
t
Continue entering the rest of the data as shown above. Note that PRESTO will
automatically calculate the elasticity.
Step 5: Define the Loads
a
u
Click the Loads tab to access the appropriate screen. Since PRESTO
automatically calculated the self-weight and topping, you only need to define
the external loads. For this tutorial, you will enter a Superimposed Dead Load
on Composite (SDL) with a magnitude of 0.01 ksf from 0 ft to 50.0 ft.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-13. Loads Tab
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-11
Step 6: Run the Analysis
Select UNI from the Type drop-down list and SD from the Class drop-down list.
Enter 0.01 in the Mag field, 0 in the Loc field, 0.01 in the Mag field, and
50 in the Loc field. Click the Add button. The load will appear in the list.
Repeat this to add the second load, as shown above.
y
p
o
Click the Analysis tab to activate the appropriate screen. PRESTO allows you
to modify or review the default load factors by clicking the Load Factors
button to activate Load Factors dialog box, as shown below. Click the OK
button to accept any changes. Clicking the Cancel button will return to the
Analysis tab ignoring any changes made.
n
o
i
t
a
u
FIGURE T-14. Load Factors Dialog Box
l
a
v
E
Click the Check Points button to open the Check Points dialog box. This
screen allows you to review or add points to be checked during analysis in
addition to or instead of points selected by the program. Add a new check point
by typing 12.50 in the Location field and then clicking the Add button. Delete
the check point at 2.08 ft by selecting it and then clicking the Delete button.
Continue adding and/or deleting check points until you have the check points
shown in the following figure.
T-12 /
PRESTO v8.6
y
p
o
FIGURE T-15. Check Points Dialog Box
n
o
When you are done, click the OK button to return to the Analysis tab.
Analysis Tab
i
t
Click the Run Analysis button. This will automatically launch the solver
engine and you will see a progress bar showing you the progress while this
module is running. PRESTO will calculate the different moments, shears, and
deflections for various load cases and then display the results on the screen.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-16. Analysis Tab
After the analysis is complete, the results will display on the screen, as shown
above. By selecting the Type, Case, and Stage drop-down lists, you can see
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-13
Step 7: Design the Beam
individual load case results and the envelope of results. You can print the
results directly to the printer or to a Microsoft Excel file by clicking the Print
button.
NOTE: Analysis does not mean that the program checks the entire beam
design for stresses and computes moment and shear capacities; it simply
means that it calculates the results for the static loads on beam analysis.
y
p
o
Now, click the Design tab. This is where the actual beam design is carried out.
By selecting the buttons at the bottom of the screen, you can modify data
pertaining to the design parameters, rebar, and strands, as explained on the
following pages. Note that since the Prestressed (w or w/o rebar) option was
selected on the Project tab, both the rebar pattern and strand pattern buttons are
available here.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
FIGURE T-17. Design Tab
v
E
Click the Design Parameters button to activate the Design Parameters dialog
box. It should default to the Design Options tab. Notice there are six tabs
available on this screen. You can step through each of these tabs to see the
different factors available and their default values. However, for this tutorial,
you will only be modifying the design options. Select the Design Options tab
and check the boxes for Horizontal Shear and Bi-Linear Analysis, as shown in
the following figure. Click the OK button and the program returns to the
Design tab.
T-14 /
PRESTO v8.6
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE T-18. Design Parameters Dialog Box
i
t
Click the Strand and Rebar button to activate the Strand and Rebar Pattern
dialog box. Note that this screen is very different from the previous version of
PRESTO. You can specify draped as well as straight strands here. You can
also specify debonding information on the screen.
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-19. Strand and Rebar Pattern (with Template Definitions)

Dialog Box
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-15
Strand Tab Screen

For this tutorial we will be using only strand which will be placed in a single
column per web.
Select Strand Vertical Planes as single. For single strand per web, change
spacing between strand vertical planes as zero. Then change strand profile to
one point. Next select Yes for Right pattern = Left pattern.
y
p
o
The Y-axis grid definition is based on the template defined in the Strand
Library. In this tutorial we will keep this definition unchanged.
Next define the depress point locations to see what exactly these locations
reference. Check the box View Template with definitions. In the elevation view
you will see A and C. Uncheck the box View Template with definitions. Specify
A as 25 feet and C as zero.
To define the first row, click in the left row and type 1. Specify left debond as
zero and specify 1 in the column list. Select the Strand ID to 1/2 270K LL.
Then confirm the pull to be 0.75. In depress Height A column, specify the
height at point A. This strand is straight, therefore, specify 2 inches.
n
o
Follow this same procedure to specify all the strand layers as shown in Figure
T-20.
.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-20. Strand Tab

Click the Design Status button to display the Design Results screen, as shown
below. Quantities that have exceeded the limiting stress values or do not
provide sufficient strength are marked with asterisks on the printout. Click the
X in the top right corner to close the Design Results screen (or the Cancel
T-16 /
PRESTO v8.6
button) and return to the Strand Pattern dialog box. Click the OK button to
close the Strand Pattern dialog box and return to the Design tab.
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE T-21. Design Results Screen
i
t
Diagram Screen
PRESTO provides you with many graphical outputs for your project results.
a
u
Select Diagrams from the Show menu to activate the Diagram screen, as shown
below. Experiment with the drop-down lists and buttons until you become
familiar with the many options in this feature, including the different graph
types and analysis or design level graphs.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE T-22. Diagram Screen
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-17
Step 9: Generate the Program Output
At this point, it would be a good idea to save your project. Select the
Save As option from the File menu. Enter the file name you want to
save your data to (e.g., MyTutor1) in the File name field and click the
Save button. The default extension is *.prt.
y
p
o
Step 9: Generate the Program Output
Select Print from the File menu to display the Print screen. Select the
appropriate options and click the OK button. Note that certain results are only
available after certain design options have been selected on the Print screen.
NOTE: Following is the output obtained from this tutorial.
This completes this PRESTO tutorial session. To exit the program, select Exit
from the File menu.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
T-18 /
PRESTO v8.6
Output
Output
OUTPUT
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 1 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
PROGRAM: Presto v. 8.6.0 LEAP Software Inc., Tampa, Fl
| BY Lea DATE Oct, 2004
PHONE : TOLL-FREE 1-800-451-5327
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PROJECT: Tutor 1 for Presto
y
p
o
INPUT DATA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PROJECT DATA
Project Name
User Job Number
State
Description
Design Code
:
:
:
:
:
:
Tutor 1 for Presto

001
FL
State Job Number : DOT-001
Double Tee example with openings and different thickness topping in r
egions
ACI 318-99
PRECAST DATA
Section Id
Type
Area,in2
Yb,in
M.I.,in4
Bfl-top,in
Tfl-top,in
H,in
Bfl-bot,in
Tfl-bot,in
Web extnt,in
Shear wid,in
V/S,in
Aoh,in2
ph,in
Stems, No
top wid,in
bot wid,in
: 8DT24a
: DOUBLE TEE
:
401.0
:
17.1
:
20985
:
96.00
:
2.00
:
24.00
:
0.00
:
0.00
:
53.75
:
9.50
:
1.43
:
121.00
:
99.00
:
2
:
5.75
:
3.75
CONCRETE DATA
Overall Len :
50.00 ft
Support Loc Left,ft
Right,ft
Release
:
0.00
0.00
Final
:
0.50
0.50
Boundaries :
4.00
4.00
Use Boundary: NO
Location
: INTERIOR
Precast
fc,psi
:
fci,psi :
Wc,lb/ft3 :
Ec,ksi
:
Eci,ksi
:
fct,psi
:
eccu
:
Topping
fct,psi :
Wct,lb/ft3:
Ect,ksi
:
i
t
n
o
ALLOWABLE CONCRETE STRESSES

Release
Comp,psi
Prec-top
2700.0
Bottom
2700.0
Final Total
Topg-top
1350.0
Prec-top
2475.0
Bottom
2475.0
Final Sustained
Topg-top
1350.0
Prec-top
2475.0
Bottom
2475.0
a
u
l
a
SPAN DATA
Tens,psi
-402.5
-201.2
-328.6
-445.0
-445.0
5500
4500
150.0
4496.1
4066.8
0
0.0030
3000
150.0
3320.6
PHI FACTORS
Flexure
:
Shear
:
Concrete,P:
Concrete,T:
Steel
:
Prestress :
Bearing
:
0.90
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.85
LOAD MULTIPLIER
Service Ultimate
CAMBER AND DEFLECTION MULT.

W/o Topg W/ Topg
DL Factor : 1.000
1.400
At erection
MISCELLANEOUS DATA
SD Factor : 1.000
1.400
Self Wt
:
1.85
1.85
SDS Fac. : 1.000
1.200
Prestress
:
1.80
1.80
Shoring
: NONE
LL/SL Fac : 1.000
1.700
Final
Transform : NO
Self Wt
Self Wt
:
2.70
2.40
Bearing
: NO
Release : 1.000
Prestress
:
2.45
2.20
Comp Shear: NO
Final
: 1.000
S.D.L
:
3.00
3.00
Hor Shear : YES
Bearing
: 1.150
Topg Wt
:
0.00
2.30
Bi-Linear : YES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TOPPING DATA
Dimensions : Topg.,in
Gap,in
Topg. Adjust.,in :
0.00
Ecc.,in : 0.000
Width
:
96.00 /
0.00
Thickness :
2.00 /
0.00
for
14.00 ft
Thickness :
0.00 /
0.00
for
6.50 ft
Thickness :
2.00 /
0.00
for
29.50 ft
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-19
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 2 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
OPENING DATA
Type
Width
Length
from Start
from Center Line
Rectangular
:
1.00 ft
by
2.00 ft
at
15.00 ft
offset
1.00 ft
Circular
:
2.00 ft
diameter
at
20.00 ft
offset
-1.00 ft
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOADING DATA
Ecc,in Description
SW
0.418 k/ft at
0.00 ft to
0.418 k/ft
at 14.00 ft
0.000 Self Wt
SW
0.393 k/ft at 14.00 ft to
0.393 k/ft
at 16.00 ft
0.000 Self Wt
SW
0.418 k/ft at 16.00 ft to
0.418 k/ft
at 19.50 ft
0.000 Self Wt
SW
0.368 k/ft at 19.50 ft to
0.368 k/ft
at 20.50 ft
0.000 Self Wt
SW
0.418 k/ft at 20.50 ft to
0.418 k/ft
at 50.00 ft
0.000 Self Wt
Topp
0.200 k/ft at
0.00 ft to
0.200 k/ft
at 14.00 ft
0.000 Topping Wt
Topp
0.200 k/ft at 20.50 ft to
0.200 k/ft
at 50.00 ft
0.000 Topping Wt
SD
0.010 k/ft2 at
0.00 ft to
0.010 k/ft2 at 50.00 ft
0.000 SD-Comp
LL
0.050 k/ft2 at
0.00 ft to
0.050 k/ft2 at 50.00 ft
0.000 LL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PRESTRESSED STRAND DATA
Strand ID: 1/2-270K-LL
LOW RELAXATION
Fpu,ksi
:
270.00
Area,in2 : 0.153
Dia,in :
0.50
Eps,ksi
: 29000.0
Length Multipliers:
Transfer
Development
Bonded:
1.00
1.00
Debonded:
1.00
2.00
Losses
: PCI
Hours to release: 24.00
Rel. humidity:
75
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PRESTRESSED STRAND PATTERN DATA
Strands: 8.00
Draped Strands: 6.00
Profile: SYMMETRICAL - ONE POINT
Pull
: 0.75 * fpu * Area = 30.98 kip per strand
i
t
a
u
Basic Transfer Length : 25.00 in

Strand patterns
L1,ft = 0.00
L2,ft = 25.00
Ycg, in =
9.00 (left)
Left
Straight
( 2) 2.00 at
2.00
Draped
( 2) 2.00 at
4.00
Draped
( 2) 2.00 at 14.00
Draped
( 2) 2.00 at 16.00
l
a
R1,ft =
in
in
in
in
STRAND GROUPS, SHIELDING AND PULL DATA

Group No of
Strand Height, in
No
Strands
Left----Depr----Right
1
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2
2.00
16.00
3.50
16.00
3
2.00
14.00
3.00
14.00
4
2.00
4.00
2.50
4.00
v
E
n
o
Basic Development Length : 79.38 in
0.00
R2,ft = 25.00
2.75 (mid)
Mid
-------2.00 at
2.50 in
2.00 at
3.00 in
2.00 at
3.50 in
Pull
Frac
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
9.00 (right)
Right
( 2) 2.00 at
( 2) 2.00 at
( 2) 2.00 at
( 2) 2.00 at
Debonding,ft
Left---Left Middle
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.00
4.00
14.00
16.00
in
in
in
in
Right---Right
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Auto Debonding Limits:

Maximum % of debonded strands: per Row = 25.0%
Total = 40.0%
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------REBAR DATA
Tension Steel
Shear Steel
T-20 /
PRESTO v8.6
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 3 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
Es,ksi : 29000.0
Fy,ksi : 60.0
Fs,ksi : 30.0
Rebar Development Length Multiplier : 1.00
y
p
o
Fy,ksi : 60.0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------REBAR PATTERN DATA

None
STIRRUPS DATA:
None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------STEM MESH DATA:
None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------BEARING STEEL DATA
Fy,ksi
: 60.0
Nu/Vu
:
0.200
Length,in :
0.00
Width,in :
0.00
Dist to Brg,in :
0.00
Theta,min :
0.00
Theta,max :
0.00
Theta,increment :
0.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
n
o
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 4 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
i
t
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CALCULATED INTERNAL CONSTANTS
Beta-1,p/c
: 0.775
Beta-1,tpg
: 0.850
fct/6.7,psi
:
0.0
Lambda,p/c
: 1.000
Lambda,tpg
: 1.000
Trans Length,in : 25.00
Sqrt(fc),psi : 74.2
Sqrt(fct),psi : 54.8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UNREINFORCED SECTION PROPERTY DATA
/------------Precast-----------/
/------------Composite-----------/
From,ft
A,in2
I,in4
H,in
Yb,in Beff,in Ac,in2
Ic,in4
Hc,in
Ybc,in
To,ft
Sb,in3
Bf,in
Bv,in (gross) Sbc,in3
Tt, in
Bt,in
Bg,in
0.00
401.00 20984.9
24.00
17.15
96.00
542.80 27490.9
26.00
19.20
14.00
1223.8
96.00
9.50
1431.9
2.00
96.00
0.00
14.00
377.00 20102.7
24.00
16.78
84.00
377.00 20102.7
24.00
16.78
16.00
1198.3
84.00
9.50
1198.3
0.00
0.00
0.00
16.00
401.00 20984.9
24.00
17.15
96.00
401.00 20984.9
24.00
17.15
19.50
1223.8
96.00
9.50
1223.8
0.00
0.00
0.00
19.50
353.00 19101.6
24.00
16.35
72.00
353.00 19101.6
24.00
16.35
20.50
1168.1
72.00
9.50
1168.1
0.00
0.00
0.00
20.50
401.00 20984.9
24.00
17.15
96.00
542.80 27490.9
26.00
19.20
50.00
1223.8
96.00
9.50
1431.9
2.00
96.00
0.00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------REINFORCED SECTION PROPERTY DATA
Loc,ft
A,in2
I,in4
Yb,in
Sb,in3
Ac,in2
Ic,in4
Ybc,in
Sbc,in3
1.50
401.00
20984.9
17.15
1223.8
542.80
27490.9
19.20
1431.9
12.50
401.00
20984.9
17.15
1223.8
542.80
27490.9
19.20
1431.9
20.00
353.00
19101.6
16.35
1168.1
353.00
19101.6
16.35
1168.1
25.00
401.00
20984.9
17.15
1223.8
542.80
27490.9
19.20
1431.9
30.00
401.00
20984.9
17.15
1223.8
542.80
27490.9
19.20
1431.9
37.50
401.00
20984.9
17.15
1223.8
542.80
27490.9
19.20
1431.9
48.50
401.00
20984.9
17.15
1223.8
542.80
27490.9
19.20
1431.9
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-21
Output
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS ( Units: ft , k , kft )

Loc SWrel SWfin
DL
Topg
SD
SL
LL
Ms
Vs
Mu
Vu
Tu
1.5 15.1
9.9
0.0
3.9
1.9
0.0
9.4
25.1
24.7
38.0
37.4
0.0
12.5 97.1
91.9
0.0
34.1
17.4
0.0
87.2 230.6
12.6 349.0
19.2
0.0
20.0 124.3 119.1
0.0
44.4
22.6
0.0 113.0 299.0
5.9 452.6
8.8
0.1
25.0 129.7 124.5
0.0
49.1
23.7
0.0 118.3 315.5
0.6 477.2
0.8
0.0
30.0 124.6 119.4
0.0
48.8
22.7
0.0 113.6 304.6
4.9 460.6
7.5
0.0
37.5 97.5
92.3
0.0
39.0
17.6
0.0
87.9 236.8
13.2 357.9
19.9
0.0
48.5 15.1
9.9
0.0
4.3
1.9
0.0
9.5
25.6
25.2
38.7
38.1
0.0
Reactions:
Sup-L 10.4
10.4
0.0
4.1
2.0
0.0
9.9
26.4
39.9
0.0
Sup-R-10.4
10.4
0.0
4.6
2.0
0.0
9.9
26.9
40.6 -0.0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PRESTRESS LOSS COMPUTATIONS ( Length = 50.00 ft
Loss computed at 25.00 ft)
A.
Final Loss (Re: PCI Design Handbook, 5th Ed, p.4-64) :
Kcir = 0.9
Eci,ksi = 4066.8
Mbm,kft = 129.7
A,in2 =
401.0
Kes = 1.0
Eps,ksi = 29000 Mll,kft = 118.3
I,in4 =
20985
Pi,k
= 247.9
ecc,in =
14.4
fcir,psi =
1692.4
(Eq 4.7.3)
ES,psi = Kes * Eps * fcir / Eci
= 12068.6
(Eq 4.7.2)
Kcr = 2.0
Ec,ksi =
4496
Shoring = NONE
fcds,psi =
574.2 (Mod. Eq 4.7.5)
CR,psi = Kcr * (Es / Ec) * (fcir - fcds)
= 14424.8
(Eq 4.7.4)
Ksh = 1.0
V/S ratio =
1.43
RH = 75%
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
T-22 /
PRESTO v8.6
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 5 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
SH,psi
Tendon
C
=
RE,psi
= (8.2E-6) * Ksh * Es * (1 -0.06* V/S) * (100 - RH) =

5434.3
type: LOW RELAXATION
fpu,ksi = 270.0 Kre = 5000 J = 0.040
1.00
fpi/fpu = 0.75 fpi,ksi = 202.5
Aps,in2 = 1.224
= [ Kre - J * (SH + CR + ES) ] * C
=
3722.9
y
p
o
(Eq 4.7.6)
(Table 4.7.1)
(Eq 4.7.7)
B.
Release Loss (Re: PCI JR 162, Sec 2.7, p.9) :
fst,psi = 202500.0
fpy,psi = 243000.0
(also ACI Comm Sec 18.5)
fst/fpy - 0.55 = 0.283
24t =
1 hrs
24t1 = 24 hrs RE,psi = 1759.8 (Eqs 16,17)
Long term:
24t1 = 100000 hrs
RE,psi = 6375.0 (Eqs 16,17)
RE adjusted,psi = 1759.77 * 3722.89 / 6375.00
= 1027.68
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PRESTRESS LOSS SUMMARY (Computed)

Item
Release,psi
Final,psi
Elastic Shortening ES
12068.6 ( 5.96%)
ES
12068.6 ( 5.96%)
Relaxation
RE
1027.7 ( 0.51%)
RE
3722.9 ( 1.84%)
Creep
-------CR
14424.8 ( 7.12%)
Shrinkage
-------SH
5434.3 ( 2.68%)
------------------------Total loss
13096.3 ( 6.47%)
35650.6 (17.61%)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-23
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 6 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
RELEASE AND FINAL STRESSES

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------RELEASE STRESSES (psi)
( Note: fci-min = 3390.5 psi )
Loc, ft ->
1.50
12.50
20.00
25.00
30.00
37.50
48.50
Prestress
Top
-50
-279
-494
-512
-421
-279
-50
Bottom
1626
2755
3136
3306
3095
2755
1626
Losses %
3.67
5.05
5.63
6.47
5.66
5.04
3.67
Self Weight
Top
59
380
597
508
488
382
59
Bottom
-148
-952
-1277
-1271
-1222
-956
-148
Total (Prestress + Self Weight)
Top
9
101
103
-4
68
102
10
Bottom
1478
1803
1859
2034
1873
1799
1478
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TENSION STEEL (in2)
Top: Reqd
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Prvd
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Bot: Reqd
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Prvd
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loc, ft ->
1.50
12.50
Prestress
Topping
0
0
Top
-45
-249
Bottom
1464
2459
Losses %
13.26
15.25
Self Wt
Topping
0
0
Top
39
360
Bottom
-97
-901
DL-Precast
Topping
0
0
Top
0
0
Bottom
0
0
Topping Wt
Topping
0
0
Top
15
134
Bottom
-38
-334
SD-Composite
Topping
4
38
Top
4
37
Bottom
-16
-146
Total (Prestress + All DL)
Topping
4
38
Top
13
281
Bottom
1313
1077
Sustained Live Load
Topping
0
0
Top
0
0
20.00
25.00
30.00
37.50
48.50
0
-442
2804
15.63
0
-451
2912
17.61
0
-376
2766
15.71
0
-250
2465
15.03
0
-45
1464
13.25
0
572
-1223
0
488
-1220
0
468
-1171
0
362
-905
0
39
-97
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
213
-456
0
192
-482
0
191
-479
0
153
-383
0
17
-42
0
109
-232
52
50
-198
50
48
-190
39
37
-147
4
4
-16
0
452
892
52
279
1012
50
331
925
39
301
1030
4
15
1309
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
u
l
a
v
E
n
o
i
t
FINAL STRESSES (psi)
T-24 /
PRESTO v8.6
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 7 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
Bottom
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total (Prestress + All DL + Sustained LL)
Topping
4
38
0
52
50
39
4
Top
13
281
452
279
331
301
15
Bottom
1313
1077
892
1012
925
1030
1309
Live Load
Topping
21
191
0
259
249
193
21
Top
20
183
543
248
238
184
20
Bottom
-79
-731
-1160
-991
-952
-737
-79
Total (Prestress + All DL + All LL)
Topping
25
229
0
311
299
231
25
Top
33
464
995
527
569
486
35
Bottom
1234
347
-268
20
-27
294
1229
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-25
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 8 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
ULTIMATE STRENGTH
Phi-Flexure = 0.9000
Loc, ft ->
1.50
12.50
20.00
25.00
30.00
37.50
48.50
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Mu, k-ft
38.0
349.0
452.6
477.2
460.6
357.9
38.7
bfl, in
96.00
96.00
72.00
96.00
96.00
96.00
96.00
tfl, in
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
bw,
in
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
Aps, in2
0.54
1.22
1.22
1.22
1.22
1.22
0.54
fse, ksi
175.65 171.62 170.85 166.85 170.68 172.07 175.68
As, in2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
As, in2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
d,
in
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
fc, ksi
3.00
3.00
5.50
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
c,
in
0.70
1.58
1.26
1.58
1.58
1.58
0.70
Beta-1
0.850
0.850
0.775
0.850
0.850
0.850
0.850
a,
in
0.59
1.34
0.98
1.34
1.34
1.34
0.59
Controls
TENS
TENS
TENS
TENS
TENS
TENS
TENS
fps, ksi
269.38 268.84 269.12 269.04 268.98 268.85 269.38
Msc,k-ft
188.0
480.2
482.1
557.7
526.7
480.3
188.0
dsc, in
17.38
20.13
20.00
23.25
22.00
20.13
17.38
cor, in
7.36
8.52
8.47
9.85
9.32
8.52
7.36
Mor,k-ft
1661.6 2012.2 1198.3 2428.7 2259.7 2012.2 1661.6
pMn,k-ft
188.0
480.2
482.1
557.7
526.7
480.3
188.0
pMn/Mu
4.95
1.38
1.07
1.17
1.14
1.34
4.85
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CRACKING LOAD (ACI Sec 18.8.3)
Auto detection
Bottom - max at 20.00 ft
Mcr = 327.09 k-ft
pMn = 482.11 k-ft
pMn/Mcr =
1.47
fr = 556.43 psi (ACI Sec 9.5.2.3)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------NOTE: Use Formulae compatible with Presto 8.2 and older to generate
Strand Stress/Strain model.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
T-26 /
PRESTO v8.6
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 9 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
VERTICAL SHEAR AND TORSION

Aoh,in2
Acp,in2
Phi-Shear
= 121.00
= 401.00
= 0.8500
ph,in
pcp,in
= 99.00
= 280.09
Ao,in2
theta
= 102.85
= 37.50
Loc, ft ->
1.50
12.50
20.00
25.00
30.00
37.50
48.50
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Vu,
k
37.4
19.2
8.8
0.8
7.5
19.9
38.1
Mu, k-ft
38.0
349.0
452.6
477.2
460.6
357.9
38.7
Tu, k-ft
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
bw,
in
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
Aps, in2
1.22
1.22
1.22
1.22
1.22
1.22
1.22
d,
in
19.20
19.20
20.00
21.25
20.00
19.20
19.20
Vd,
k
15.4
7.8
3.8
0.5
3.0
8.2
15.9
Md, k-ft
15.7
143.4
186.1
197.2
191.0
148.9
16.2
Vi,
k
21.9
11.4
5.0
0.3
4.5
11.7
22.2
Mmax,k-ft
22.3
205.6
266.5
280.0
269.6
209.0
22.6
Mcr, k-ft
209.7
181.6
130.2
173.8
163.5
176.1
209.2
Vci,
k
229.9
26.0
24.2
25.8
24.2
26.2
230.0
P-eff, k
154.8
210.1
209.1
204.2
208.9
210.6
154.8
Ybc,
in
19.20
19.20
16.35
19.20
19.20
19.20
19.20
fpc, psi
273
440
592
425
450
447
274
Vp,
k
3.2
4.4
4.4
0.0
4.3
4.4
3.2
Vcw,
k
65.5
75.8
87.4
78.2
79.3
76.2
65.6
Vc,
k
65.5
26.0
24.2
25.8
24.2
26.2
65.6
Vs req, k
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Vs,max, k
108.2
108.2
112.7
119.8
112.7
108.2
108.2
AvC,in2/ft
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Tlim,k-ft
4.1
4.7
5.2
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.1
AtC,in2/ft
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Av+2At,min
0.06
0.06
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.06
0.06
Av+2At
0.06
0.06
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.06
0.06
Av-prvd
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Phi*Vn/Vu
1.49
1.15
2.34
27.09
2.76
1.12
1.46
Al,
in2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
S-max, in
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
S-prvd, in
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
f-act,psi
205
105
47
4
39
109
209
f-alw,psi
810
625
613
613
613
626
810
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Units: Av+2At,min -> in2/ft; Av+2At -> in2/ft; Av-prvd -> in2/ft
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------HORIZONTAL SHEAR
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
Loc, ft ->
1.50
12.50
20.00
25.00
30.00
37.50
48.50
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Vnh, k
21.6
11.3
0.0
0.2
4.5
11.5
21.7
bv, in
96.00
96.00
0.00
96.00
96.00
96.00
96.00
Vnh,max
17280.0 17280.0
0.0 17280.0 17280.0 17280.0 17280.0
Avh,min
0.09
0.09
0.00
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-27
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 10 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
Ahs,in2/ft
0.09
0.09
0.00
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
Ahr,in2/ft
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Units: Vnh,max -> k; Avh,min -> in2/ft
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
T-28 /
PRESTO v8.6
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 11 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
CAMBER AND DEFLECTIONS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CAMBER AND DEFLECTION MULTIPLIERS
Erection: SW = 1.85
Prest = 1.80
Final
: SW = 2.40
Prest = 2.20
DL = 3.00
Topg = 2.30
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------BI-LINEAR COMPUTATIONS (Ref: Branson and Trost, PCI Journal Sep/Oct 1982)
Ig, in4 =
27491
Icr, in4 =
5139
Mc0,kft =
261.9
Mcr(-Mc0),kft =
122.4
Load Level
: Prest.
+SW (1)
+DL (2)
+Topg (3) +SD+SDS (4) +SL+LL (5)
Ma(-Mc0),kft :
-137.4
-137.4
-88.3
-64.7
53.6
Ie, in4
:
27491
27491
27491
27491
27491
Ig / Ie
:
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CAMBER AND DEFLECTIONS (in)
Loc, ft ->
RELEASE
Prestress
Self Wt
TOTAL
1.50
12.50
20.00
25.00
30.00
0.16
-0.07
0.09
1.12
-0.49
0.63
1.46
-0.66
0.81
1.53
-0.69
0.84
1.46
-0.65
0.80
ERECTION
Prestress
Self Wt
TOTAL
0.16
-0.08
0.08
1.88
-0.82
1.06
2.51
-1.12
1.39
2.63
-1.17
1.45
FINAL
Prestress
Self Wt
DL-Prec
Topping
SD-Comp
TOTAL
0.20
-0.10
0.00
-0.03
-0.02
0.05
2.30
-1.07
0.00
-0.36
-0.19
0.68
l
a
n
o
i
t
a
u
3.06
-1.45
0.00
-0.49
-0.26
0.87
3.21
-1.52
0.00
-0.52
-0.27
0.90
2.50
-1.11
1.38
3.05
-1.44
0.00
-0.50
-0.25
0.86
37.50
48.50
1.11
-0.49
0.62
0.16
-0.07
0.09
1.87
-0.82
1.05
0.16
-0.08
0.08
2.29
-1.07
0.00
-0.37
-0.18
0.67
0.20
-0.10
0.00
-0.03
-0.02
0.04
SL-Sust L
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
LL-Live
-0.03
-0.32
-0.43
-0.44
-0.42
-0.30
-0.03
TOTAL
0.02
0.37
0.44
0.46
0.44
0.36
0.02
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*NOTE: Positive deflection is up, negative deflection is down.
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-29
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 12 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
DESIGN SUMMARY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MEMBER INFO
----------Section Id
: 8DT24a
Support Loc Left,ft
Right,ft
Type
: DOUBLE TEE
Release :
0.00
0.00
Overall Len,ft :
50.00
Final
:
0.50
0.50
Location
: INTERIOR
Boundaries :
4.00
4.00
fc,psi: 5500
fci,psi: 4500
fct,psi: 3000
Strand ID: 1/2-270K-LL
LOW RELAXATION
Eps,ksi: 29000.0
Strands: 8.00
Draped Strands: 6.00
Profile: SYMMETRICAL - ONE POINT
L1,ft = 0.00
L2,ft = 25.00
R1,ft = 0.00
R2,ft = 25.00
Ycg,in =
9.00 (left)
2.75 (mid)
9.00 (right)
Release Losses,%: 6.47 at 25.00ft
Final Losses,%: 17.61 at 25.00ft
STRESSES (psi)
--------------
-------- Allowable ------Topping

Top
Bottom
RELEASE STRESSES
Compression
Tension
at the Ends
FINAL STRESSES
Compression
Tension
ULTIMATE STRENGTH
------------------Loc,ft
:
20.00
Mu,k-ft
:
452.6
pMn,k-ft :
482.1
pMn/Mu
:
1.07
Aps,in2
:
1.22
fse,ksi
: 170.85
As,in2
:
0.00
As,in2
:
0.00
dsc,in
:
20.00
c,in
:
1.26
a,in
:
0.98
fps,ksi
: 269.12
----------
2700.0
-402.5
-402.5
1350.0
-328.6
2475.0
-445.0
i
t
PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS RESULTS

------------------------------Loc,ft
:
1.50
20.00
Ac,in2
:
542.80
353.00
Ic,in4
:
27490.9
19101.6
Mu,kft
:
38.0
452.6
Vu,k
:
37.4
8.8
30.00
542.80
27490.9
460.6
7.5
CAMBER AND DEFLECTIONS (in)

--------------------------Release
Erection
Loc,ft
:
25.00
25.00
Prestress :
1.53
2.63
Final
25.00
3.21
v
E
----------
311/25.00
VERTICAL SHEAR AND TORSION

-------------------------Loc,ft
:
48.50
Vu,k
:
38.1
Tu,k-ft
:
0.0
Mu,k-ft
:
38.7
Vc,k
:
65.6
Tlim,k-ft :
4.1
Av+2At
:
0.06
Al,in2
:
0.00
S-max,in :
18.00
Loc,ft
:
48.50
f-act,psi :
209
f-alw,psi :
810
a
u
l
a
n
o
2700.0
-201.2
-201.2
2475.0
-445.0
-------------- Computed -------------Topping/Loc

Top/Loc
Bottom/Loc
37.50
542.80
27490.9
357.9
19.9
103/20.00
-4/25.00
2034/25.00
995/20.00
1234/ 1.50
-268/20.00
HORIZONTAL SHEAR
-------------------Loc,ft
:
48.50
Vnh,k
:
21.7
Ahs,in2/ft :
0.09
Ahr,in2/ft :
0.00
48.50
542.80
27490.9
38.7
38.1
Erection Mult.
Prestress
Final Mult.
1.80
T-30 /
2.20
PRESTO v8.6
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 13 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
Self Wt
:
DL-Prec
:
Topping
:
SD-Comp
:
SL-Sust L :
LL-Live
:
TOTAL
:
-0.69
-1.17
0.84
1.45
-1.52
0.00
-0.52
-0.27
0.00
-0.44
0.46
Self Wt
DL
Topping
:
:
:
1.85
n
o
y
p
o
2.40
3.00
2.30
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
/ T-31
Output
Company Name
PHONE:
813 555 5555 | SHEET 14 OF 14
Address Here
City,
ST 12345 | JOB NO. 001
TAMPA AREA: 813-985-9170 | CKD.
DATE
y
p
o
PRODUCTION SUMMARY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PROJECT DATA
Project Name
: Tutor 1 for Presto
User Job Number : 001
Description
: Double Tee example with openings and different thickness topping in r
: egions
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION DATA: DOUBLE TEE
8DT24a
Overall Member Length: 50.00 ft
Height: 24.00 in
Top Flange:
Width: 96.00 in
Thickness:
2.00 in
Bottom Flange:
Width:
7.50 in
Thickness: 22.00 in
Initial Camber:
0.84 in
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CONCRETE: Normal Weight
Release Strength:
4500
psi
Density
: 150.00 lb/ft3
Final Strength :
5500
psi
Beam weight: 20885.42
lb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PRESTRESSING:
Use 8.00 1/2-270K-LL
Fu: 270.00 ksi
LOW RELAXATION
Strand patterns
Left
Mid
Right
Straight
( 2) 2.00 at
2.00 in
-------( 2) 2.00 at
2.00 in
Draped
( 2) 2.00 at
4.00 in
2.00 at
2.50 in
( 2) 2.00 at
4.00 in
Draped
( 2) 2.00 at 14.00 in
2.00 at
3.00 in
( 2) 2.00 at 14.00 in
Draped
( 2) 2.00 at 16.00 in
2.00 at
3.50 in
( 2) 2.00 at 16.00 in
Holddown:
5.16 k
at 25.00 ft from left end
5.16 k
at 25.00 ft from right end
Stress
:
:
191.09 psi at
170.85 psi at
n
o
i
t
25.00 ft release
25.00 ft final
a
u
Initial Prestress Force:

0.75*fpu*Area = 30.98 k / Str
Elongation per member :
4.19 in
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MATERIAL REQUIRED ( per member )
Concrete
:
5.16 Cubic Yards
Strand
:
400.00 Linear Feet
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
l
a
v
E
T-32 /
PRESTO v8.6
CHAPTER FIVE
Theory
y
p
o
This chapter explains some of the assumptions and procedures of PRESTO in

greater detail than found elsewhere in this manual. Unless otherwise stated,
references in this manual refer to the Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-99) and the Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-05). Separate sections are provided for
methodologies where the two codes are significantly different. We have
provided common sections where the methodologies are similar. Design code
references that are the same and apply to both codes are listed as ACI 318-99/05.
Code references for CSA A23.3-94 with 2001 revisions are provided separately.
When a requirement applies to only one code, the appropriate reference is
listed.
i
t
a
u
General Overview
n
o
PRESTO is a program for the design and analysis of precast, prestressed, and
l
a
v
E
mild reinforced beams. The following lists some of the basic features of
PRESTO:
The program operates in

modes.
ACI 318-99, ACI 318-05,
and
Draped or straight strand profile
Stress-relieved or low relaxation strands
Point, uniform, or trapezoidal loads
Rectangular and circular openings
Members with mild steel only
Complete flexibility regarding specification of materials used in

design
Complete libraries of strand and rebar that can be edited by the user
Stem Mesh and/or Stirrup Specification
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
CSA 23.3-94
/ TH-1
Layout
Some advanced features of the program include:
Cantilevers
Variable topping thickness
Strain compatibility
Bilinear deflection analysis
Combined shear and torsion analysis
Cracked section properties and stresses
y
p
o
Beam self-weight and topping weight are automatically computed and applied to the
member. These weights are calculated based on the user-specified unit weights for
these materials. The user may specify dead and live loads that are point, uniform, or
partially distributed on the composite or non-composite section.
PRESTO automatically selects several typical points for analysis. You may specify
additional points for the analysis.
n
o
Straight, one-point, or two-point depressed strand patterns may be modeled. Multiple

layers of rebar in the precast or the topping can be specified with straight, hooked, or
mechanical anchorage. PRESTO automatically determines whether a given layer of
reinforcement is in tension or compression and handles it accordingly. Strand patterns
can vary from the depression point (if present) and at each end.
i
t
At release conditions, the amount of non-prestressed reinforcement is computed, if

required to control excess tension in the precast. Also indicated are hold-down forces at
one or both depression points and the minimum release strength of the concrete.
a
u
Total stresses at the top and bottom of the beam and the top of the topping at each
check point are included in the final design. Calculations for ultimate strength and
cracking ratio are also performed.
Layout
l
a
The beam is modeled as a simply supported beam with up to 2 unequal cantilevers. The
overall length of the member is the out-to-out dimension of the beam. The end support
lengths are treated as cantilevers during release and service conditions.
v
E
Flange openings can be rectangular or circular. The size of a rectangular opening is

defined by its transverse and longitudinal dimensions. For computational purposes,
circular openings are replaced internally with equivalent rectangular openings. The
transverse dimension is equal to the diameter of the circle and the longitudinal
dimension is equal to one-half of the diameter of the circle.
Topping
Members may be non-composite (untopped) or composite (topped). The topping has
both a thickness and a width, and is divided into two portions, the slab and the gap. The
slab is modeled as a rectangle and is defined by PRESTO as the portion of the topping
that is directly over the precast section. The gap is defined as the portion of the topping
TH-2 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Topping
outside the slab, which also has a thickness. The gap width is usually calculated as the
boundary width minus the slab width.
Boundary distance is separated into left and right boundary distances on either side of
the centerline of the web extent (see effective width and web extent definitions in
Appendix 1). The left and right boundary distances can be equal or unequal in size
depending on the location of the precast member (i.e. interior or exterior).
y
p
o
When the user-specified boundary distance is less than the actual precast section width,
the parts of the precast flange protruding beyond the specified left and right boundary
distances will be removed upon user choice. An example of this may be seen in the
figure below where, if the left and right boundary distances are equal to 3 feet (0.91 m)
and the user selects to adjust the section properties based on boundary distances, the
portions of the flange (cross-hatched) that protrude past the boundary distances are
ignored (chopped off), thereby resulting in a smaller effective width. These changes to
the internal dimensions of the member will produce different section properties in
subsequent calculations and also alter the self-weight of the actual section.
4'-0"
2"
4'-0"
a
u
2"
l
a
n
o
i
t
3.75
"
2'-0"
4'-0"
2'-0"
4'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
5.75
"
4'-0"
4'-0"
3'-0"
Left Boundary Width
2'-0"
3'-0"
Right Boundary Width
2'-0"
3.75
"
5.75
"
FIGURE TH-1. User Specified Left/Right Boundary Distances
v
E
Boundary distance also affects the design loads since any assigned uniform loads are
converted internally into linear loads of constant magnitude. This happens when the
uniform load is multiplied by the total (left + right) boundary distance specified. For
example, if both the left and right boundaries are equal to 4 feet (1.22 m), and the
uniform load is equal to 2 ksf (95.76 kN/m), then the magnitude of the linear load is
equal to (4 + 4) 2 = 16 klf ((1.22 + 1.22) 95.76 = 233.5 kN/m). The calculated
linear load will then be applied to the applicable areas of the member. If the left
boundary distance is not equal to the right boundary distance, additional torsion effect
is calculated.
However, for members with openings, a different situation results. For example, if
there is an opening of 2 feet 2 feet (0.61 m 0.61 m) within the section of the right
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-3
Section Properties
boundary distance located 5 feet (1.52 m) from the left end, the program will divide the
member into three zones, 1, 2, and 3 (Zone 2 being the 2 foot (0.61 m) section with the
opening). The magnitude of the linear load will then be ePqual to (8 - 2) 2 = 12 klf
((2.44 - 0.61) 95.76 = 175.1 kN/m) applied the length of Zone 2.
For hollow core sections, this boundary width is used somewhat differently for section
properties. The program first determines the properties for the entire precast section
and then determines a ratio of boundary width to total precast section width. It then
reduces the section properties by that ratio.
y
p
o
Section Properties
In the calculation of section properties, PRESTO first subdivides the member into
zones of uniform, unreinforced sections. Both unreinforced non-composite and
composite section properties are then computed. Next, reinforced (transformed) section
properties are calculated at selected check points. By default, the reinforced section
properties only include effects from the mild reinforcement. However, the user may
override this default behavior by specifying that the program also use the strand in the
calculation of the transformed section properties. PRESTO computes unreinforced
section properties in the following manner:
n
o
1.
After the topping is placed and the gap width computed, PRESTO
calculates the effective width of the combined topping slab and gap. This is
called the gross effective width (Beff).
2.
PRESTO then uses the opening data to reduce the precast flange as well as
i
t
the gross effective width.

3.
Finally, precast section properties are recomputed from the reduced precast
section combined with the net effective topping slab and gap, modified by
the ratio of elasticities for the topping and precast concrete.
a
u
All of the precast flange (after consideration of boundary distance) is considered

effective for both section properties and ultimate strength calculations. While the
provisions of Arts. 8.10.2 and 8.10.3 of ACI 318-99/05 are not applicable to precast
concrete (as per Art. 18.1.3), they are utilized for computing the effective width of the
topping. The program also assumes that the effective width of topping cannot be
smaller than the width of the precast top flange. Since the provisions in ACI 318-99/05
for effective width do not take into account the possibility of uneven lateral spacing of
the prestressed members, the effective width of each side of an interior beam is
computed separately. The first criterion of ACI 318-99/05, Art. 8.10.2 is reinterpreted as
1/8th span length on each side of the centerline of the member. In CSA mode, effective
width is computed based on 10.3.3 (a), (c), and (d).
l
a
v
E
For exterior beams, ACI 318-99/05, Art. 8.10.3 and CSA 23.3-94, Art. 10.3.4 are applied to
both sides of the section making it applicable to cases with a small overhang on one
side.
For beams with multiple webs, the overhang is measured from the outer faces of the
end webs. The value of the web-extent (calculated as the out-to-out distance of the
two end webs) is utilized for this purpose. A similar approach is adopted in CSA 23.3-94
when Arts. 10.3.3 and 10.3.4 are applied.
TH-4 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Prestress Losses
For beams with both a topping slab and a topping gap, subparagraphs (a) and (b) of ACI
318-99/05, Art. 8.10.3 are independently applied to: (1) combined topping slab and
precast flange measured from the faces of the end webs; and (2) gap concrete measured
from the edge of the precast flange.
NOTE: When computing the negative moment capacity of sections with tapered stems
(such as double tees, key joists, etc.), the total bottom width of the stems is considered
as the compression width.
y
p
o
Other important section properties include the moment of inertia, distance to the
centroid of section, and volume to surface ratio of the cross-section. These values are
calculated during the addition or modification of sections in the Beam Sections Library.
The program approximates the volume to surface ratio by calculating the area to
perimeter ratio.
When in ACI 318-05 mode, the program also computes section properties for final
behavior under total loads. These properties are for the gross section if the section at
final behaves as an Uncracked or In Transition section. However, if the sections
behavior at final is as a Cracked section, PRESTO determines the side of the crack as
Bottom, TopTopg, or TopPrec. TopTopg suggests that the top of the topping starts to
crack first. TopPrec means the section is cracked at the top of the precast.
n
o
PRESTO in ACI 318-05 reports the computed crack depth. If the crack starts at the
bottom, this is measured from the bottom of the precast up. If the crack starts at the top,
and there is no topping slab, crack depth is measured from the top of the precast. If a
slab is present, it is measured from the top of topping slab downwards. In both cases,
crack depth is reported as a real number. The program then uses the uncracked concrete
and steel transformed to arrive at the cracked section properties.
i
t
a
u
Prestress Losses
PRESTO allows four different types of analysis for the prestressed losses:
l
a
v
E
PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition).
PCI losses are computed using the procedures described in Refs. [8] and [9].
The PCI Design Handbook (Ref. [9]) is used to compute final losses,
including elastic shortening and long-term steel relaxation, while Journal Art.
(Ref. [8]) is used to compute steel relaxation at release. The equations from
Ref. [8] for computing steel relaxation at release are modified so that longterm steel relaxation loss, when computed on the basis of 100,000 hours,
coincides with the value given by Ref. [9].
CPCI Design Handbook (3rd Edition) Simplified Method.
Losses are computed using the simplified approach presented in the CPCI
Design Handbook. This has been adopted from Ref. [4].
Time-Dependent.
Time-dependent prestress losses are computed using the procedures outlined

in Ref. [8]. Note that the program assumes there is accelerated curing of the
concrete and that the creep and shrinkage of the concrete both start at
release.
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-5
Analysis
Manual (User-Defined).
User-defined prestressed losses allow the user to specify both release and
final losses. Note that in this last case, the program only checks to see if the
release losses are less than the final losses, it does not check the validity of
the assigned values.
y
p
o
Live load recapture is an option presented to the user to take into account the temporary
increase in strand stress, calculated as a decrease in prestress losses, which occurs only
during the application of the live load.
Analysis
PRESTO establishes several check points for prestressed members at the following
locations:
H/2: As per ACI 318-99/05, Art. 11.1.3.2 and CSA 23.3-94, Art. 11.3.2 (b), sections
between H/2 and the face of the support may be designed for the same shear
that exists at H/2.
Transfer: In a prestressed member, the prestress force is transferred to the

concrete by bond. The length required to accomplish this transfer is referred
to as the transfer length. PRESTO uses 50 strand diameters as allowed in
ACI 318-99/05, Art. 11.4.3 and CSA 23.3-94, Art. 11.2.12 to calculate the transfer
length.
0.4L from Each End: For members with 1-pt depress, this point is usually
close to the critical point for service loads, and is also usually the depress
point for 2-pt depressed strand profiles.
i
t
a
u
n
o
Midspan: This is usually the point of maximum moment.
The critical point is defined as the point of minimum margin of safety under working
loads. For members with a straight strand profile, the critical section is also the point of
maximum moment (usually the midspan). For members with a 1-pt depress, the critical
point is close to 0.4L. For simply supported members with a 1-pt depress and uniform
loads, the location of the critical point can be calculated using the following equation:
l
a
v
E
x = 0.5 (e mid e end )

L
(48M s )
where:
x
location of the critical point, measured from the end of the member
emid =
eccentricity of the strands at midspan
eend =
eccentricity of the strands at the end
effective prestressing force after all losses
Ms =
service load moment at midspan
overall length of the member
TH-6 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Loads
For members with a 2-pt depress strand profile, nonlinear loads, or cantilevers, the
critical point can occur practically anywhere. Note that PRESTO does not directly
calculate the location of the critical point. The user should use the preceding discussion
and their own judgment to determine if they need to enter additional analysis points to
find the critical point.
y
p
o
For members with only mild reinforcement, the program generates check points at the
following locations:
D: As per ACI 318-99/05, Art. 11.1.3.1 and CSA 23.3-94, Art. 11.3.2(a), sections
between D and the face of the support may be designed for the same shear as
that computed at a distance D.
L/4: It is a widely followed practice to use the shear steel required at L/4
through the middle half of the span.
Midspan: As with prestressed members, the maximum moment usually

occurs at the midspan of the member.
The critical point for mild reinforced members usually occurs at the midspan,
especially for simply supported members with uniform loads.
n
o
Loads
PRESTO recognizes the following load classifications:
i
t
Self-weight (SW): The program automatically calculates self-weight using

the defined cross-section and any openings entered by the user.
Non-Composite Dead Load (DL): Non-composite dead loads are those

permanent loads that are resisted by the precast section alone. One special
non-composite dead load is the topping.
a
u
Topping: The program automatically calculates the dead load of the topping
based on the width and thickness assigned by the user.
l
a
Superimposed Dead Load (SD): Superimposed dead loads (or the

composite dead load) are those permanent loads applied to the composite
section.
Composite Loads: These are presented to the user in slight variation in ACI
318-99 and CSA 23.3-94 with ACI 318-05 modes.
v
E
Composite Snow Loads (SDS): In ACI 318-99 and CSA 23.3-94, the
composite snow load is the load due to snow applied to the composite
section.
External Loads on Composite (Lr/S/R): The external loads on

composite that come from roof live loads/snow loads/rain loads
according to ACI 318-05.
Live Loads (LL): Live loads are applied either to the non-composite or the
composite section, whichever is applicable. Note that the live loads are not
considered permanent.
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-7
Stresses ACI 318-99
Sustained Live Loads (SL): Sustained live loads are the same as live loads
but they apply on the beam for a considerably longer period of time (but not
permanent).
Load factors are available to the user for both dead loads and live loads. Note that the
topping is considered a dead load for the application of load factors. Multipliers are
provided for self-weight at both release and service, thereby enabling the user to
simulate inclined members (ignoring axial effects) and to analyze such members as
horizontally cast wall panels.
y
p
o
Stresses ACI 318-99
Stresses are calculated at both release and final conditions. The calculated stresses are
checked against the user-specified allowable stresses, and any calculated stresses found
to be in excess of the allowable are flagged. Note that the program automatically
calculates the allowable stresses based on ACI 318-99, Art. 18.4. Any of the calculated
stresses may be overridden. One case where the user may want to override the
calculated stress is when the member meets the requirements of ACI 318-99, Art.
18.4.2(d). In applying Art. 18.4.1(c), the end distance is considered as the transfer length
distance from end.
n
o
At release, the minimum required compressive strength of the precast is also calculated
and printed for the user. If tension stresses are in excess of the allowable stresses at
release, PRESTO automatically calculates the tension steel necessary to satisfy ACI
318-99, Art. 18.4.1.
i
t
Stresses ACI 318-05
a
u
In ACI 318-05, stress computations and allowable limits are very similar to those in ACI
318-99 at release. PRESTO computes these stresses in accordance with ACI 318-05, Art.
18.4.1. At final, ACI 318-02, Art. 18.3.3 requires sections to be classified as U/T/C
(Uncracked/Transition/Cracked) based on the total stress. Following is the
classification criteria:
l
a
v
E
Class
Tension Stress Range
U (Uncracked)
f t 7.5 f c
T (Transition)
7.5 f c < f t 12 f c
C (Cracked)
f t > 12 f c
At final, PRESTO first computes individual stresses due to prestress, dead load,
topping, etc. separately based on gross section properties. These computations are very
similar to those for ACI 318-99. After computing the individual stress, the program
computes total stress at each location. It then tries to classify the section as U/T/C.
TH-8 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Stresses ACI 318-05
There are several possible scenarios. In the first scenario, the entire section is in
compression. In this case, the section is classified as U (Uncracked). In the second
scenario, there is tension at the bottom of the section. PRESTO compares the stress at
the precast bottom to the uncracked stress limit specified by the user. If stress is less
than the maximum allowed for uncracked, the section is classified as U (Uncracked). If
the actual total stress is more than the maximum allowed for uncracked but is less than
the maximum allowed for in transition, the section is classified as T (Transition). If the
total stress is more than the maximum allowed for transition, the section is classified as
C (Cracked).
y
p
o
In the third scenario for classification, tension exists at the top of the section. This
tension could be at the top of the precast section or at the top of topping (in the case of
a composite section), or at the top of both the precast section and the topping. If the
section is non-composite (no topping present) and tension is less than the maximum
allowed for an uncracked section, it is classified as U (Uncracked). If the tension is
greater than the maximum allowed for uncracked but less than the maximum allowed
for transition, it is classified as T (Transition). For a composite section classified as U
(Uncracked), the stress at the precast top is less than the maximum allowed for the
uncracked precast section and the stress at the topping top is less than the maximum
allowed for the uncracked slab.
n
o
A section will be classified as CS (Cracked Slab) if the stress in the slab is more than
the maximum allowed in transition but stress in the precast top is less than the
maximum allowed in transition. A section will be classified as CB (Cracked Beam)
only if the stresses at the top of the precast beam exceed the maximum allowed for in
transition. The remaining cases are classified as T (Transition) sections.
i
t
When a section is classified as CS or CB, PRESTO recomputes the cracked section

properties and total stresses in the cracked section. In this scenario, the program
assumes the concrete in a cracked section does not take any tension. Its tension
contribution is ignored. This is in line with the methodology presented in the paper,
Analysis of Cracked Prestress Concrete Sections: A Practical Approach, by Dr.
Robert F. Mast (Ref. [5]). This has been suggested in ACI 318-05, Art. R18.3.2.2 for such
stress calculations.
a
u
l
a
v
E
When crack is at the bottom, the program-computed crack depth is from the bottom of
the section to the neutral axis. Stresses are then computed that are zero at the location
of the section and at the top of the crack depth (neutral axis). In this case, all tension is
resisted by transformed steel. Refer to the detailed methodology in the paper by Dr.
Mast (Ref. [5]).
For a composite section with cracking at the top, PRESTO uses the following
approach. It first computes stresses at the top of the precast and the top of the slab using
uncracked section properties. If stresses at the top of topping are such that it is cracked,
the program checks the top of the precast section for cracked stresses and classifies the
section as C (Cracked). The program then computes crack depth, cracked section
properties, and compressive stress at the bottom of the precast.
If, on the other hand, stresses computed with uncracked section properties show that
only the slab is cracked, the stresses are computed again. This time, the program
ignores any concrete slab and uses the uncracked section properties of the precast
section along with any rebar in the slab to determine stresses at the precast top. If
stresses are such that the section is cracked, it is classified as C (Cracked) and the
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-9
Stresses CSA 23.3-94
approach previously discussed is used to compute crack depth, section properties, and
stresses.
In a case where the topping is cracked but the precast section is not, the section is
classified as CS. The crack depth will be equal to the thickness of the slab at that
location. However, the stresses will be based on the uncracked precast section ignoring
any slab concrete but considering any slab rebar.
y
p
o
In the last possible scenario, topping does not crack but the precast section cracks. This
is classified as CB. In this scenario, the program conservatively ignores the slab and
crack is considered to extend from the top of the slab to the neutral axis of the section
and considers only the cracked precast section and any rebar in the topping. Stresses
are based on these section properties. In order to compute sections based on gross
(uncracked section properties), change the allowables for U and T limits to a large
value that does not let this section crack. The results based on gross section can then be
waived; however, this should be exercised very carefully.
The limits specified in Art. 18.4.2 are applicable only for U and T sections.
Stresses CSA 23.3-94
n
o
Stresses are calculated at both release and final conditions. The calculated stresses are
checked against the user-specified allowable stresses, and any calculated stresses found
to be in excess of the allowable are flagged. Note that the program automatically
calculates the allowable stresses based on CSA 23.3-94, Art. 18.4.2. Any of the calculated
stresses may be overridden. One case where the user may want to override the
calculated stress is when the member meets the requirements of CSA 23.3-94, Art.
18.4.2(d).
i
t
a
u
At release, the minimum required compressive strength of the precast is also calculated
and printed for the user. If tension stresses are in excess of the allowable stresses at
release as per CSA 23.3-94, Art. 18.4.1, PRESTO automatically calculates the tension
steel necessary to satisfy CSA 23.3-94, Art. 18.4.1.2.
l
a
Crack Control ACI 318-99/05

requires a check on the distribution of reinforcement in nonprestressed beams to control cracking. PRESTO determines the required spacing of
rebar based on Eq. 10-4 as required in Art. 10.6.4. To determine this required spacing, the
program uses the fs value, which is 2/3 of fy. This check is done at the bottom of a
reinforced section if it is under positive moment or at the top if it is under negative
moment. In a negative moment scenario, the program computes the provided spacing at
the top of section at the location of steel closest to the extreme tension face.
ACI 318-99/05, Art. 10.6
v
E
requires a check for the spacing of rebar and bonded prestressing

for sections that are classified as C (Cracked). This ensures that cracks are controlled.
For cases where crack occurs at the bottom, the program checks crack control at
bottom. For cases when crack occurs at top, the program checks this in the slab if the
section is cracked and has a slab. When there is no slab and crack is at top, the program
checks the top of the precast section.
ACI 318-05, Art. 18.4.4
For a precast section, if the provided steel closest to the extreme tension face is nonprestressed steel, the program computes the required spacing as per Art. 10.6.4.
TH-10 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Crack Control CSA 23.3-94 and ACI 318-95
However, if the steel is a strand, the program computes required spacing based on Arts.
18.4.4.2 and 18.4.4.3. If mixed rebar and strands are present, the program computes
required spacing for strand and rebar and uses whichever is critical.
For required spacing (S-req) calculations, clear cover plays an important role. A large
value may result in a negative value for S-req and the program limits S-req to 7.00
inches. Please note that the user must revise the steel pattern to reduce clear cover that
results in adequate crack control.
y
p
o
To compute provided spacing, the program determines the number of rebar plus any
strands that are distributed in the tension width (TensWid). When there is only one bar/
strand present at the tension face, S-prov is equal to TensWid. When two or more bars/
strands are provided in a section, considering the largest spacing between any two bars
as the provided spacing.
PRESTO indicates if the bars/strands are provided with more average spacing than
required. For C (Cracked) sections, delta fps is determined based on the stress/strain
diagram for the cracked section. If delta fps is less than 20 ksi, there is no need to check
this spacing as suggested in Art. 18.4.4.3 and the program reports it as not required. For
U (Uncracked) and T (Transition) prestressed concrete sections, this requirement does
not apply and the program does not compute required spacing.
n
o
Crack Control CSA 23.3-94 and ACI 318-95
i
t
and ACI 318-95, Art. 10.6.4 require quantity z to be computed.

These codes also provide limiting values for interior and exposure. For the calculation
of z, the program uses fs = 0.6fy as permitted by CSA 23.3-94 as well as ACI 318-95. If the
clear concrete cover is greater than 2 inches (50 mm), the program uses a limiting value
of de = 2 in (50 mm). For epoxy-coated rebar, CSA 23.3-94, Art. 10.6.1 allows for the
modification of the value of z by a factor of 1.2. In this case, the user may specify the
computed value in the program.
CSA 23.3-94, Art. 10.6.1
a
u
Ultimate Strength ACI 318-99/05
l
a
The nominal internal resisting moment Msc is computed using strain-compatibility

assumptions, which conform to ACI 318-99/05. The following assumptions are used:
v
E
1.
A rectangular Whitney stress block replaces the parabolic concrete stress

block as allowed per ACI 318-99/05, Art. 10.2.7.1. The depth of the stress block,
a, is calculated as:
a = 1c
where:
1 =
factor defined in ACI 318-99/02, Art. 10.2.7.3, using the compressive

strength of the concrete at the compression face
depth to the neutral axis
NOTE: When computing the depth of the neutral axis, the program uses fc
(slab) for computing the positive moment region and fc (precast) for the
negative moment regions.
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-11
Ultimate Strength CSA 23.3-94
2.
An elastic-ideal plastic stress-strain relationship is used for mild steel as

allowed in ACI 318-99/05, Art. 10.2.4. The modulus of elasticity for mild steel
can be specified by the user.
3.
Two options for idealized stress-strain curve are available for the
prestressing strand.
4.
Plane sections remain plane.
5.
Any change of strain in the reinforcement after release is accompanied by an

equal change of strain in the adjacent concrete (i.e. no slippage).
6.
Final concrete strain at the extreme compression fiber is limited to 0.003 as

per ACI 318-99/05, Art. 10.2.3.
7.
If the topping is in the compression zone then the concrete strength of the
topping is used when calculating the internal resisting moment.
y
p
o
The equilibrium of forces (C = T) is determined from the geometry of the strain

diagram and the stress-strain curves for both strand and mild steel. An iterative
approach is used to calculate the depth of the neutral axis, and after each iteration, C
and T are recalculated and compared. The iteration loop proceeds until the difference
between the two values is negligible. Note that in the calculation of C an equivalent
force is subtracted for each steel level within the compressive stress block to account
for the displaced concrete. When C and T have converged, the moments are
summed about the compression face and the provided moment is:
i
t
where:
a
u
l
a
n
o
Msc = Mn
Msc =
provided moment strength based on strain compatibility
strength reduction factor for flexure
Mn =
nominal moment strength
v
E
The nominal internal resisting moment Msc is computed using strain-compatibility

assumptions, which conform to CSA 23.3-94. The following assumptions are used:
1.
Equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution replaces the parabolic

concrete stress as allowed in CSA 23.3-94, Art. 10.17. The depth of the stress
block, a, and the stress in the rectangular block, are calculated as:
Concrete strength = 1cfc
a = 1c
where:
1 =
factor defined in CSA 23.3-94, Art. 10.1.7(c) to compute equivalent

rectangular compressive stress in concrete
TH-12 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
c =
resistance factor for concrete. As per CSA 23.3-94, Art. 8.4.2.
fc =
specified compressive strength of concrete
1 =
factor defined in CSA 23.3-94, Art. 10.1.7(c) using the compressive

strength of the concrete at the compression face
depth to the neutral axis
y
p
o
NOTE: When computing the depth of the neutral axis, the program uses fc
(slab) for computing the positive moment region and fc (precast) for the
negative moment regions.
2.
An elastic-ideal plastic stress-strain relationship is used for mild steel as

allowed in CSA 23.3-94, Art. 8.5.3.2. The modulus of elasticity for mild steel
can be specified by the user.
3.
Three options for idealized stress-strain curve are available for the
prestressing strand including the one specified in Fig. 8.2.4 of the CPC1
Design Manual, 3rd Edition (Ref. [4]).
4.
Plane sections remain plane.
5.
Any change of strain in the reinforcement after release is accompanied by an

equal change of strain in the adjacent concrete (i.e. no slippage).
6.
Final concrete strain at the extreme compression fiber is limited to 0.0035 as

per CSA 23.3-94, Art. 10.1.3.
7.
If the topping is in the compression zone then the concrete strength of the
topping is used when calculating the internal resisting moment.
n
o
a
u
i
t
The equilibrium of forces (C = T) is determined from the geometry of the strain

diagram and the stress-strain curves for both strand and mild steel with c, s, and p
applied to forces computed in concrete, reinforcing bar, and prestressing tendons
respectively as specified in CSA 23.3-94, Arts. 8.4.2 and 8.4.3. An iterative approach is
used to calculate the depth of the neutral axis, and after each iteration, C and T are
recalculated and compared. The iteration loop proceeds until the difference between
the two values is negligible. Note that in the calculation of C an equivalent force is
subtracted for each steel level within the compressive stress block to account for the
displaced concrete. When C and T have converged, the moments are summed about
the compression face and the provided moment is = Msc.
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-13
Prestressing Strand Stress-Strain Curves

PRESTO has three sets of stress-strain curves for prestressing strands. The first set is
as per the PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition). As per Design Aid 11.2.5, the following
equations are used to determine the stress for a specific strain value.
fps
y
p
o
Eps = 28,500 ksi

fpu = 270 ksi
fpu = 250 ksi
0.0086
0.0076
ps
FIGURE TH-2. Stress-Strain Curves per PCI Design Handbook 5th Edition
n
o
PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition)

250ksi
i
t
f ps = 28,500ps (ksi) when ps 0.0076
f ps = 250
0.04
ps 0.0064
(ksi ) when ps > 0.0076
a
u
270 ksi
f ps = 28,500ps (ksi ) when ps 0.0086
f ps = 270
0.04
ps 0.007
(ksi ) when ps > 0.0086
There is slight discontinuity in the two equations for 270 ksi steel. To overcome this in
this program, we limited the computed stress to be less than 245 ksi when we use the
equation for the elastic region. The stress-strain curve for prestressing strand has a
linear and a nonlinear segment.
Previous versions of PRESTO used different stress-strain curves than specified by
code because of discontinuity in the linear and nonlinear segments of the curve. This is
available as an option and uses the following equations.
l
a
v
E
fps
fpu = 270 ksi
fpu = 250 ksi
Es
0.0078
Eps
FIGURE TH-3. Stress-Strain Cures for Prestressing Strand
TH-14 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
PRESTO 8.2 and Older Methodology

250ksi
270 ksi
f ps = E sps when ps 0.0078
f ps = E sps when ps 0.0078
f ps = 250
0.03816
f ps = 270
when ps > 0.0078
( ps 0.007)
0.2361
ps + 0.0017
when ps > 0.0078
FIGURE TH-4. PRESTO 8.2 and Older Methodology
y
p
o
where:
Es =
Elasticity of strand = 28,500 ksi
ps =
strain in strand
fps =
stress in strand corresponding to ps
fpu =
ultimate tensile strength of the strand
a
u
l
a
n
o
i
t
Ep = 190,000 MPa
fps
fpu = 1860 MPa
fpu = 1720 MPa
0.0065
0.008
Ep
FIGURE TH-5. Stress-Strain Cures for Prestressing Strand Elasticity
v
E
CPCI Design Handbook (Metric units)

1860 MPa
f ps = E s ps when ps 00.008
.0078
f ps = 1848
where:
Es
0.517
ps 0.0065
< 0.98 f pu ( MPa )
1720 MPa
f ps = E s ps when ps 00.008
.0078
f ps = 1710
0.400
ps 0.006
< 0.98 f pu (MPa )
Elasticity of strand = 190,000 MPa
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-15
Design Methodology ACI 318-99
ps
strain in strand
fps
stress in strand corresponding to ps
fpu
ultimate tensile strength of the strand
y
p
o
Before a prestressed section is checked to see if it is over-reinforced, the average depth,

dsc, to the tension force centroid based on strain-compatibility is computed using the
following equation:
d sc =
( Psi d si + Pmjd mj )
( Psi + Pmj )
where:
Psi =
prestressed force in the ith strand level as determined by straincompatibility (including strands in the compression block, if any)
dsi =
depth to Psi
Pmj =
mild steel force for the jth steel level in the tension zone only, as
determined from strain-compatibility
dmj =
depth to Pmj
n
o
i
t
If the depth to the neutral axis calculated from strain-compatibility, c, is greater than
the over-reinforced limit implied by ACI 318-99 of cor = 0.4235 dsc, then the section is
considered over-reinforced. Reduced design strength is calculated as required by ACI
318-99, Art. 18.8.2. A new strain diagram is drawn where the depth to the neutral axis is
taken as equal to cor. Only the forces in the compression zone are considered and
moments are taken about dsc. The following equation is used to calculate Mor:
a
u
l
a
Mor = [dsc dc)Cc + (dsc dmj)Cmj]
where:
v
E
0.9
Cc =
concrete compression force
dc =
depth to the centroid of Cc
Cmj =
compressive force in the mild steel at the jth level in the

compression zone
dmj =
depth to Cmj
The factor 0.4235 can be derived from the relationship between p and the depth to the
neutral axis. The critical ratio, p, for the rectangular section is defined in ACI 318-99
as:
TH-16 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
A ps
p =
bd sc
f ps
f c
A ps f ps
=
= 0.361
(bd or f c )
Given that (Apsfps) = T (total tensile force at ultimate), and T = C (total compressive
force), we can say that:
y
p
o
(A ps f ps ) = C = 0.85f c b1c or
Substituting the above equation into the equation for p, we obtain the following:
(0.85f c b1c or )
(bd sc f c ' )
= 0.361
which reduces to:

cor 0.36
=
= 0.4235
dsc 0.85
n
o
Over-reinforcement for a member reinforced with only mild steel is calculated

differently than that for a prestressed member. Mild reinforced members use
reinforcement ratios to check for both minimum reinforcement and overreinforcement. The intent remains the same as for prestressed members, however, to
ensure ductile behavior at ultimate conditions. The maximum amount of tension
reinforcement is calculated as per ACI 318-99, Art. 10.3.3. Required minimum
reinforcement is checked against the provisions of ACI 318-99, Art. 10.5.
i
t
a
u
The cracking load provision for prestressed members from ACI 318-99, Art. 18.8.3 is
interpreted as the lower limit of the ratio of the ultimate moment capacity and the
cracking moment at that section which will fail first if the applied loads are increased
linearly to failure. This is the section with the least value of moment capacity/ultimate
moment ratio Mn/Mu (i.e., the least factor of safety).
l
a
v
E
The cracking moment (Mcr) computed in this context is the sum of the total dead load
moment plus the additional live load moment required to develop a tensile stress equal
to the modulus of rupture. The point of reference for computing Mcr for sections with
net positive moment is the bottom of the precast section. However, it should be noted
that for sections of net negative moment, the point of reference is: (1) the top of the
precast for untopped sections; or (2) the top of the topping for topped members.
Satisfaction of the cracking moment criteria can sometimes be difficult to achieve. Two
conditions seem to recur which we will identify here in order to give insight into this
problem.
First, short members with very stiff sections and few strands tend to have
very large cracking moments (high denominators) with low ultimate
capacities (low numerators). The result then is low cracking ratios. The
strategy of effective treatment for this problem is to increase the amount of
non-prestressed reinforcement. This can be accomplished by increasing the
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-17
number of strands while reducing the overall pull, or adding supplemental

rebar, or both.
Second, short members, though not necessarily unusually stiff, can suffer
cracking ratio problems near the end regions due to insufficient development
of the strands at ultimate conditions. This is especially common when a
development length multiplier greater than one is used. Adding nonprestressed reinforcement can often remedy this situation.
Finally, note that Art. 18.8.3 of ACI 318-99 allows you to ignore the cracking
moment if the member has twice the shear and flexural capacity required by
Art. 9.2.
y
p
o
In ACI 318-99, the specifications to control cracking in reinforced concrete sections

were revised completely. Now, the maximum bar spacing is specified instead of
cracking index, z. PRESTO uses ACI 318-99 Eq. 10-5 to calculate the required spacing
of bars. In Art. 10.6.4, it is permitted to use fs as 60 percent of specified yield strength.
By default, PRESTO uses this value but you may specify a different value. Clear cover
is the distance between the extreme tension rebar face to the tension face of the beam.
n
o
In the ACI 318-05, Art. 10.3 requires the sections to be classified as Tension Controlled,
In Transition, or Compression Controlled. PRESTO uses the criteria outlined in Arts.
10.3.3 and 10.3.4 to determine this and then applies factors as per Art. 9.3.2. PRESTO
first determines the layer of strand or rebar closest to tension face. Distance from
extreme compression fiber to this layer of steel closest to the extreme tension face is
defined as dt. The program then computes the distance to neutral axis, c, for the applied
moment from extreme compressive force and then determines c/dt value. It then
compares these c/dt values with those in Art. R9.3.2.2. PRESTO uses the following
ranges as per that section:
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
Controls
TENS
(Tension Controlled)
TRANS
(In Transition)
COMP
(Compression Controlled)
c/dt range
Phi Factor
c
0.375
dt
0.90
0.600
c
0.375
dt
c
> 0.600
dt
0.90 0.65
0.65
If the section is classified as an In Transition section, PRESTO calculates an

interpolated value based on a linear variation of with c/dt. Note that the values used in this
section are as per code and are default values set in this program. However, users can override
these values by either manually modifying these values or using the Save Settings feature.
TH-18 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Shear ACI 318-99/05
y
p
o
FIGURE TH-6. Variation of with c/dt
Shear ACI 318-99/05
Vertical shear is usually considered resisted by the precast section web only. However,
if the user directs the program to use the composite depth for shear, then both the
precast web and the topping directly above the web will be used to resist shear. In this
case, the user must make sure that the web reinforcement extends into the topping as
required by ACI 318-99/05, Art. 17.4. When you select composite depth, f'c for girder is
used for composite section shear calculations.
n
o
i
t
For prestressed members, there is generally some confusion associated with the terms
Mmax (maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads), Mcr
(moment causing flexural cracking at section due to externally applied loads), and Vi
(factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads occurring
simultaneously with Mmax) as defined in ACI 318-99/05, Eq. (11-10). The Commentary
for Art. 11.4.2 states, In deriving Eq. (11-10) it was assumed that Vci is the sum of the
shear required to cause a flexural crack at the point in questionplus an additional
increment of shear required to change the flexural crack to a flexure-shear crack.
a
u
l
a
VM
Vci = 0.6 f c b w d + Vd + i cr
M max
v
E
When coupled with the equations for Vi and Mmax, (ACI

11.4.2), it implies that:
Eq. (11-10)
318-99/05, Commentary, Art
Vd is the shear force due to dead load (Md being the corresponding moment);
(Vi Mcr)/Mmax is the shear force due to live load causing flexural cracking;
and
0.6( fc' )bwd is the extra shear required to turn it into the flexure-shear
crack.
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-19
Torsion ACI 318-99/05
From the mechanics of failure described above, it is clear that Vd is the shear force
resulting from total dead load at the section (assuming it does not cause cracking).
The equations in ACI 318-99/05 Commentary indicate that Mmax is the difference
between Mu (factored moment at the section) and Md (moment due to unfactored dead
load), and that Vi is the difference between Vu (factored shear force at the section) and
Vd (shear force due to unfactored dead load). Since the term (Vi Mcr)/Mmax represents
the extra shear developed at the section (in addition to Vd) when the section develops
y
p
o
6 f c , it follows that the term Mcr (for the purpose of shear
cracking tension of
computations) is the live load moment required to develop this cracking tension. ACI
appears to assume a linear increase in shear as the applied moment is increased
from Md to Mu. This definition of Mcr also agrees with ACI 318-99/05, Eq. (11-11) when
applied to a purely precast section. Nevertheless, Mcr is computed from the first
principles since Eq. (11-11), in its given form, is unsuitable for composite sections and
for various shoring conditions.
318-99
According to the Commentary for ACI 318-99/05, Art. 11.5.5.4, tests of prestressed beams
with minimum web reinforcement based on Eq. (11-13) and Eq. (11-14) (if applicable)
indicated that the smaller Av obtained from these two equations was sufficient to
develop ductile behavior. Therefore, PRESTO computes minimum shear steel from
both equations unless midspan effective pressure is less than 40 percent, and adopts the
smaller value. The gross prestressed steel area, Aps, used in Eq. (11-14) disregards the
effects of shielding and development length. Peff used in calculations is reduced
according to the transfer length near the end of the member. For beams where midspan
prestress is less than 40 percent, PRESTO computes minimum steel only based upon
Eq. 11-13.
n
o
i
t
a
u
Vertical shear for mildly reinforced members is calculated using the applicable
equations from ACI 318-99/05, Arts. 11.3 and 11.5. It is assumed that the axial tension is
not significant.
l
a
v
E
As required by ACI 318-99/05, Art. 17.5.2, PRESTO uses the total vertical shear for the
horizontal shear computation at the section under consideration. This is equivalent to
setting Q/IB of the classical relation VQ/IB equal to 1. Only loads applied on the
composite section are considered.
Torsion ACI 318-99/05

Torsion design specifications in ACI 318-99/05 are based on the thin-walled, space truss
analogy. PRESTO follows Art. 11.6 of this code for design of sections subjected to
torsion.
According to ACI 318-99/05, it ignores the concrete torsional capacity of the section.
This means that value of concrete shear capacity (Vc) is not affected by the presence of
torsion at a section. Further all the torsion has to be resisted by providing closed
stirrups.
recommends that you ignore the torsion if it is less than 25
percent of the cracking torsional moment. However, if the present torsion is more than
ACI 318-99/05, Art. 11.6.1
TH-20 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Shear and Torsion - PCI Design Handbook, 6th Edition
that, the section must contain closed shear stirrups to resist the total torsion present.
Section capacity with additional torsional reinforcement is computed using ACI 318-99/
02, Eq. 11-21. For a prestressed section with effective prestress of larger than 40 percent
of its tensile strength, the value of is taken as 37.5 degrees. For sections with lesser
prestress or reinforced sections it is taken as 45 degrees. Acp and Pcp computed by
PRESTO are based on the actual concrete section. However, Aoh and ph computation
is based on the entire section for rectangular, hollow core, key joist and slab. For other
shapes, only the web stem widths are used to compute these parameters and will be
equal to results for one stem multiplied by number of stems. For variable width stems,
the average width is used in computations.
y
p
o
When torsional reinforcement is required, PRESTO also checks for additional

longitudinal reinforcement as per ACI 318-99/05, Eq. 11-22. This reinforcement should be
distributed uniformly around the sides of the perimeter. PRESTO does not reduce the
longitudinal reinforcement as specified in ACI 318-99/02, Art. 11.6.3.9.
If torsional steel is required, minimum transverse reinforcement must be checked

according to ACI 318-99/02, Art. 11.6.5.2 and minimum longitudinal reinforcement is
checked as per Art. 11.6.5.3. The maximum spacing of the torsion design required is
determined based upon ACI 318-99/02, Art. 11.6.6.1. However, since PRESTO only
computes the additional reinforcement, the distribution along the perimeter is left to the
user to define, and who should follow the guidelines of ACI 318-99/05, Arts. 11.6.6.2 and
11.6.6.3 for the detailing of such reinforcement.
n
o
i
t
PRESTO also checks for compression allowed and compression present in the section
as per ACI 318-99/05, Eq. 11-18 for nonvoided section and Eq.11-19 for voided (hollow)
sections. The correction of Art. 11.6.3.3 is applied for thin sections for the computation
of compression present in the section.
a
u
Shear and Torsion - PCI Design Handbook, 6th Edition

When this option is selected on the Design Parameters screen, the program calculates
the shear and torsion as per the PCI Design Handbook (6th edition) methodology
section 4.4 Torsion. (Reference 9 in Appendix 6). This option is provided as an
alternate to the conservative design suggestions from ACI 318-02. This option is
available for all sections other than hollow core slabs in the current version due to
complications in the computation of x2y for hollow core sections.
l
a
v
E
Shear and Torsion CSA 23.3-94

provides two methods for shear and torsion design. As per CSA 23.3-94, Art.
sections not subject to significant axial tension may be designed using the
simplified approach as per Art. 11.3. For other cases, it requires that shear and torsion be
designed using the general method as per Art. 11.4 of the code or using the STA option
of Art. 11.5. PRESTO provides user options to design for shear and torsion using either
the simplified method (Art. 11.3) or the general method (Art. 11.4).
CSA 23.3-94
11.1.1,
When applying the simplified method, concrete section shear capacity, Vc, for
reinforced sections is based on Art. 11.3.5 and, for prestressed concrete sections, is
computed using CSA 23.3-94, Arts. 11.3.6 and 11.3.7. CSA 23.3-94, Eq. 11-8 is very similar
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-21
Camber and Deflections
to ACI 318-99/05, Eq. 11-10, which is discussed in detail beginning on page TH-19. The
same approach is adopted for CSA implementation.
If applied torsion on the section is less than the limiting value of 0.25Tcr, as specified
in CSA 23.3-94, Art. 11.2.9.1, no torsion reinforcement is needed. However, if applied
torsion is more than the limiting value, the program computes the required torsional
steel based on Art. 11.3.9.4 and longitudinal steel using Art. 11.3.9.5.
Minimum total transverse steel requirements are based on Arts.
Maximum spacing of transverse stirrups is based on Art. 11.2.11.
y
p
o
11.2.8.1
Program uses fps as computed by strain compatibility.
and
11.2.8.4.
When a user applies the general method for shear and torsion calculations, the program
computes Vc based on Art. 11.4.3.1. For calculations using this method, the programs
uses dv in computations. Where dv is the distance between the resultant compressive
and tension forces due to flexure but not less than 0.9d.
In Vc calculations, the program uses the computed value of and as per Art. 11.4.4,
Table 11.1 for sections with at least the minimum transverse steel. The program
computes x using Eq. 11-22 and factored shear stress using Eq. 11.21. It then
interpolates in Table 11.1 to arrive at the and values. Once is determined, required
stirrup area is determined using Eq. 11-19 in CSA 23.3-94, Art. 11.4.3.2.
n
o
When torsion is also present and the general method is used, the program uses
i
t
Art.
11.4.10.3 for computation of x and Vf. Torsion reinforcement is computed using Eq. 11-
of CSA 23.3-94. Art. 11.4.10.3.
25
When selecting the composite depth for using shear calculations, program still uses the
girder fc and c values to arrive at concrete capacity.
a
u
Camber and deflections are computed using the procedure outlined in the PCI Design
Handbook (5th Edition). Release, erection, and final conditions are checked. This
procedure requires applying the coefficients to the release deflections for prestress and
self-weight; cantilevered sections were handled as follows:
l
a
v
E
1.
A set of initial deflections was computed for prestress and self-weight using
release properties but final support conditions.
2.
Appropriate multipliers were applied to these values in order to arrive at the

erection and final deflection.
3.
The actual computational procedure used was a variation of the standard

conjugate beam method.
Using the symbol M-I(J) as the moment of the M/EI diagram between two points, I and
J, about the point J, and denoting the left and right supports as points A and B, it can be
shown that the deflection at any point X, from the chord AB, is the reaction at B when
a downward force equal to M-A(B) is applied at point X and an upward force equal to
M-A(X) is applied at point B. This procedure is valid for the simple span region and
the right cantilever. A slightly modified procedure is applicable to the left cantilever.
TH-22 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Long-term camber and deflections are computed using multipliers suggested by Table
of the PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition) and Fig. 3.5.4 of the CPCI Design
Manual (3rd Edition); however, the user may modify these.
4.8.2
If non-prestressed reinforcement is added to a member, final camber and deflection

multipliers are recomputed by Eq. 4.8.6 of the PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition) or
Art. 3.5.4 of the CPCI Design Manual (3rd Edition):
C1 +
C2 =
1+
y
p
o
As
A ps
As
A ps
PCI, Eq. 4.8.6
where:
C1 =
multiplier from the PCI Design Handbook,

the CPCI Design Handbook, Fig. 3.5.4
C2 =
revised multiplier
As =
area of non-prestressed steel
Aps =
area of prestressed steel
n
o
Figure 4.8.2 (Ref. [9])
or
i
t
ACI 318-99, Art. 18.4.2(d), requires that the deflection be computed using the bilinear
load-deflection relationship for the case of fiber stress in tension in a precompressed
tensile zone of members exceeding the modulus of rupture (fr). In ACI 318-99 mode, the
program leaves it to the user to activate the option to compute bilinear deflections.
a
u
ACI 318-05, Art. 18.3.5 provides guidance on calculation of deflections. For uncracked
sections, the code suggests to use Art. 9.5.4.1. For transition and cracked sections, the
code suggests to use Art. 9.5.4.2, which provides guidance of calculations using bilinear
deflections methodology. Depending upon the behavior if a section is cracked,
PRESTO automatically computes deflections based on bilinear methodology.
l
a
v
E
The code stipulation to compute the deflection, using the cracked cross-section and
the transformed areas of bonded reinforcement to compute the member stiffness was
limited to the midspan point (halfway between the supports) since Art. 9.5.2.4 of the
Commentary states that: The use of the midspan section properties for continuous
prismatic members is considered satisfactory in approximate calculations primarily
because the midspan rigidity (including the effect of cracking) has the dominant effect
of deflections....
The effective moment of inertia used to calculate deflections is calculated by:
M
M
I e = cr I g + 1 cr
Ma
Ma
I cr
ACI 318-99, Eq. (9-7)
ACI 318-05, Eq. (9-8)
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-23
where:
M cr = f r
ACI 318-99, Eq. (9-8)
Ig
yt
ACI 318-05, Eq. (9-9)
fr
modulus of rupture
Ig
moment of inertia of the gross section
y
p
o
Icr =
moment of inertia of the cracked section transformed to concrete
Ma =
maximum moment at stage deflection is computed
PRESTO considers the following five load stages:
Prestress + Self weight
A + Dead load on precast
B + Topping weight
C + Dead load on composite
D + Live load
n
o
i
t
An interesting problem arises from ACI 318-99, Art. 9.0, which defines the gross moment
of inertia, Ig, as the moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis,
neglecting reinforcement. It is unclear why the transformed moment of inertia has
been omitted since the above definition creates an anomalous condition where in cases
of heavily reinforced, flanged members, Ie may be larger than Ig of the concrete section
alone.
a
u
The reason for this anomaly is simple. Eq. (9-7) of ACI 318-99 (Eq. (9-8) of ACI 318-05) is
a curve representing the transition of the effective moment of inertia. As stated in the
Commentary to Art. 9.5.2.5, The effective Ie was developed to provide a transition
between the upper and lower bounds of Ig and Icr as a function of the ratio Mcr/Ma. For
most practical cases Ie will be less than Ig.
l
a
v
E
This transition ranges from an uncracked section for low levels of applied moment
(Ma) to a cracked section when Ma literally approaches infinity. However, while the
uncracked moment of inertia (Ig) does not consider the transformed steel, the cracked
moment of inertia (Icr) does. It would appear logical to consider the transformed steel
in both the calculations of Ig and Icr in order to eliminate the possibility of an actual
increase in moment of inertia when a section cracks.
PRESTO adopts the following procedure when the ACI 318-99/05 code definition of Ig
is used to compute uncracked deflections:

1.
Ig and Icr are computed at midspan.
2.
Ma and Ie are computed for the five load stages.
TH-24 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Development Length
3.
A deflection multiplier (Ig/Ie) is computed for each load stage, with a lower
limit of 1 (to avoid the anomalous condition where Ie > Ig).
4.
The uncracked deflection for each load component is computed with an

applicable long-term modifier (PCI Design Handbook (5th Edition), Eq. 4.8.6
and Table 4.8.2 or the CPCI Design Manual (3rd Edition), Art. 3.5.4 and Fig.
3.5.4).
5.
Uncracked deflections for each load stage are obtained by adding the
component values.
6.
The cracked deflection for each load stage is obtained by multiplying the
uncracked value with corresponding Ig/Ie.
7.
Finally, the cracked deflection due to each load component is obtained by

subtracting the deflection for each load stage from the successive stage.
y
p
o
Note that the effective moment of inertia, Ie, is not applied to all loads, but only to
those cases where loadings cause the curvature of the beam to exceed zero.
It is clear that a considerable gap can occur between computed deflections and actual
deflections when one considers the approximate nature of prestress losses, long-term
coefficients, elasticity, modulus of rupture, applied loading, extent of cracking, ambient
conditions and myriad other factors. Therefore, extreme accuracy for a basically
imprecise computation as prestressed member deflection seems unwarranted. Please
note that this computation is not an accurate prediction but rather the translation of
certain code formulas and provisions based on LEAPs knowledge and understanding.
Development Length
n
o
a
u
i
t
Computation of development length (ld) of prestressed strand from ACI 318-99/05, Art.
12.9.1 and CSA 23.3-94, Art. 12.9.1 results in a circular calculation. To calculate the
development length we must first calculate fps (stress in prestressed reinforcement at
nominal strength). This requires, however, that we first calculate the effective area of
strand present at a section.
l
a
v
E
In addition, fps itself varies from point-to-point. To calculate the effective area of strand
at a specific section, we must first know the development length. It is readily apparent
that an exact application of the ACI Code provisions will result in a computational
complexity of unwarranted magnitude that yields no perceptible benefit.
In the past, it has been customary to use simplifying assumptions to break the impasse,
with fps computed at midspan being the most commonly used assumption. While this
approach is satisfactory for basic cases such as simple span symmetrical beams with
symmetrical strand patterns, it presents problems for the cases with end-pattern extents
and unsymmetrically located multiple depress points that PRESTO simulates. Thus, it
was considered prudent to compute ld with fps set equal to fpu (specified tensile
strength of prestressing tendons), which results in conservative values.
PRESTO computes an effective area of strand in regions of partial development at
ultimate conditions by handling each strand separately. The development curve of

prestressed strands is idealized as the bilinear curve in the following figure. The
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-25
Lightweight Concrete
effective area of strand is the full area of a strand times the percentage of fps that the
strand realizes as determined from the curve below.
f ps
y
p
o
f se
S tra nd
S tres s
( k s i)
d b
50
D is t a n c e F r o m B e a m E n d
n
o
C
ld
FIGURE TH-7. Development Curve of Prestressed Strands
Development length calculations for mild rebar follows the procedures outlined in
Chapter 12 of ACI 318-99/05 and Chapter 12 of CSA 23.3-94. PRESTO automatically
determines whether the bar is in compression or tension and uses the correct
development length for that case. Program uses the formulas for other case rebars of
ACI 318-99/05 Arts 12.2.2 and CSA 23.3-94 Table 12-1. Note that rebar which is
mechanically anchored is always assumed to be fully developed.
a
u
i
t
Lightweight Concrete
The provisions of Arts. 9.5.2.3(b) and 11.2.1.2 of ACI 318-99/02 and Art. 8.6.5 of CSA 23.394 refer to grades of lightweight concrete as all-lightweight and sand-lightweight.
To simplify computations, the lightweight concrete multiplier (Lambda) was assumed
to vary linearly from 0.75 to 1.0 over a concrete unit weight range from 110 pcf to 150
pcf (1750 kg/m3 to 2400 kg/m3).
l
a
v
E
Reduction Factors
The user can assign capacity reduction factors () for flexure and shear, as well as the
reduction factors for concrete, rebar, and prestressing. These factors, in conjunction
with the load factors available to the user, are helpful for conformance with codes other
than ACI and CSA. Please note that ACI requires only for flexure and shear to be
used and does not use material related to factors. Whereas CSA uses factors for
material only and does not use f flexure or shear. The program internally uses both sets
to arrive at the final results. It sets the non-required factors to 1.0. However, the user
may specify both sets, in which case, caution is warranted.
TH-26 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Bearing Analysis
Bearing Analysis
If requested by the user, PRESTO can check to see if the bearing satisfies the
requirement for an unreinforced bearing and the required steel for a reinforced bearing
following the procedure outlined in Arts. 6.7-6.9 of the PCI Design Handbook (5th
Edition). An upper limit of the bearing load is calculated using ACI 318-99/02, Art. 10.17,
instead of the equation (Vu,max = 1.2 f'c A1) found in the PCI Design Handbook (5th
Edition). Also, a suggested minimum value of Ash is calculated using a value of 3.4 for
e. Cantilevered bearing points (if any) are automatically checked, along with the
simple span bearing with the largest value of Vu. Note that the program does not
calculate the required steel for cantilevered bearings, it only checks to see if the
conditions satisfy the requirements for an unreinforced bearing.
y
p
o
The area of the crack plane, Acr, in PCI Eq. 6.7.2 takes into account the bottom flange
but not the top flange of the precast section. The area A2 in Eq. 6.8.1, is determined by
first calculating the distance from the edge of the bearing area A1 to the nearest free
edge. If the bearing area A1 is adjacent to a free edge, then A2 will be equal to A1.
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6 Theory
/ TH-27
Bearing Analysis
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
l
a
v
E
TH-28 / Theory
PRESTO v8.6
Appendix One
Nomenclature and
Printout Explanation
y
p
o
This section is an explanation of the items that appear in the output. They are
presented in the order in which they appear.
n
o
Labels Used Throughout the Printout

A, Ac
Area of non-composite or composite section
As, A's
Total area of mild tension or compression steel
Aps
Total area of prestressing strand
Class
In ACI 318-05 mode, the classification of a section based on Art. 18.3.3
Comp
Compression or Composite
DL
Ec
Ecc
l
a
Eci
Eps
Ect
i
t
a
u
dia
Diameter
Dead Load
Modulus of elasticity of the precast concrete at final
Eccentricity
Modulus of elasticity of the precast concrete at release
Modulus of elasticity of the prestressing strand
Modulus of elasticity of the topping concrete
Compressive strength of the precast concrete at final
Compressive strength of the precast concrete at release
Compressive strength of the topping concrete
Splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete
fpy
Yield strength of the prestressing strand
fpu
Ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing strand
Fy
Yield strength of the mild steel
H, Hc
Height of non-composite or composite section
I, Ic
Moment of inertia of the non-composite or composite section
LL
Live Load
Loc
Location
f'c
v
E
f'ci
f'ct
fct
PRESTOv8.6 Nomenclature and Printout Explanation

/ A1-1
Appendix One
Mcr
Total moment required to cause cracking
M.I.
Moment of Inertia of the precast section
Mu
Factored moment
Prec
Precast
RH, Rel Hum
Relative Humidity
Sb, Sbc
Section modulus w.r.t. bottom of non-composite and composite section
SD
Superimposed Dead Load
SDS
Superimposed Dead Load of Snow
SL
Sustained Live Load
Tens
Tension
Topg
Topping
Theta
Crack angle to be checked during bearing analysis
Tu
Factored torsion
Vu
Factored shear
Wc, Wct
Unit weight of the precast/topping concrete
Wct
Unit weight of the topping concrete
Yb, Ybc
Distance between c.g. and bottom of non-composite and composite section
Zone
Prismatic zone in which section properties do not change
Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional

reinforcement
a
u
:
Width of the bottom and top precast flanges (if any)
Bottom width of a typical stem
Ultimate concrete compressive strain
Interior or exterior (ACI 318-95, Art.10.6.4)
Height of the precast section
Length
End or Interior span (ACI 318-95, Art.8.10)
ph
Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional reinforcement
SDL
Superimposed Dead Load
Shear wid
Width of member used to resist vertical shear
Stems
Web(s) of the precast section
Tfl-bot, top
Thickness of the bottom and top precast flanges (if any)
top wid
Top width of a typical stem
Trib. Wid
Tributary width
V/S
Volume to Surface ratio
Web extnt
Web extent, out to out dimension of the tops of exterior webs
wt
Weight
Bfl-bot, top
Bot wid
ecu
l
a
Exposure
H
Len
Location
v
E
i
t
Project Data
Aoh
n
o
y
p
o
A1-2 / Nomenclature and Printout Explanation

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix One
Topping Data
Gap
Portion of topping not directly on top of the precast section
Topg
Portion of topping directly on top of the precast section
Days to top
Number of days between release and placement of Topping
Days to Comp DL
Number of days between release and application of composite DL
Hours to release
Hours between tensioning and release
Length Multipliers
Strand development and transfer length multiplier.
Prestressed Strand Data
Prestressed Strand Pattern Data

Depress point
Dep. pt
Spacing
Distance between c.g.s of adjacent strand levels at depress
Str
Strand
Y-cg
Distance between strand c.g. and bottom of precast section
n
o
Strand Groups, Shielding and Pull Data
i
t
Depr
Depress
L1
Left straight extent for draped strands
L2
Left depress point location from left end for draped strands
Pull Frac
Pull Fraction
Right straight extent for draped strands
Right depress point location from right end for draped strands
Modulus of elasticity
Allowable stress in the mild steel
Dev. len
Development length
L-c, R-c
Development length of left/right ends of rebar in compression
L-t, R-t
Development length of left/right ends of rebar in tension
a
u
R1
R2
Rebar Data
l
a
Es
Fs
y
p
o
Rebar Pattern Data
v
E
Stirrups
Distance from left edge of beam to the first stirrup in the group closest to end.
Left Offset
Right Offset
Distance from right edge of beam to the first stirrup in the group closest to end.
No. of Stirrups
Physical number of stirrups in group.
Id
Rebar Id from library designating size.

/ A1-3
Appendix One
Spacing
c/c spacing of stirrups for selected group.
End Beam
Reference face of beam for selected group. Can be left or right. When both
option is selected, program places two groups - one starting from each face of
the beam.
Paired
Paired bars denote double the reinforcement of selected stirrup Id.
Type
Will not affect engineering calculations. Only for use with detailing/drafting
packages.
y
p
o
Bearing Steel Data

Dist to Brg
Distance between centerline of bearing and end of the member
Length
Length of bearing surface measured parallel to span
Nu/Vu
Ratio of the horizontal to the vertical force at supports
Width
Width of bearing surface measured perpendicular to span
Calculated Internal Constants
n
o
Beta-1, p/c
Factor defined in ACI 319-99, Art. 10.2.7.3 for the precast
Beta-1, tpg
Factor defined in ACI 319-99, Art. 10.2.7.3 for the topping
Lambda, p/c
Lightweight modifier for the precast (ACI 318-99, Art. 11.2.1.2)
Lambda, tpg
Lightweight modifier for the topping (ACI 318-99, Art. 11.2.1.2)
Trans Length
Transfer Length
i
t
Stem Mesh Data
a
u
:
Distance from the bottom of beam to lowest horizontal bar in mesh
Bottom Clearance
Distance from the bottom of beam to lowest horizontal bar in mesh
ID
Rebar ID from library designating size of vertical bars of mesh reinforcement
Top Clearance
Spacing
l
a
Start
End
Distance between the vertical bars of the mesh reinforcement
Distance from left end of beam of the start of the mesh reinforcement
Distance from left end of beam of the end of mesh reinforcement
Unreinforced Section Property Zone Data
v
E
Beff
Effective width of the top flange (topping or precast)
Bf
Top precast flange width
Bg
Width of the gap, or the total boundary distance less Bt
Bt
Width of the topping over the precast section
Bv
Shear width of the member
Bw
Web width used in shear calculations
Tt
Thickness of the topping over the precast section
This Section Prints Only In ACI 318-05 Mode

Ace
Area of composite effective (after crack) sections

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix One
Crack Depth
Depth of crack. For crack at bottom, measured from bottom of uncracked

section. For crack at top, measured from top of topping if precast or from top of
precast if there is no topping.
Ice
Inertia of composite effective (after crack) sections
Sbce
Section modulus of composite effective section (after crack, if any)
TensSide
Side of the beam that is in tension. None means the entire section is in
compression
Ybce
Distance between C.G. and bottom of composite effective (after crack) section
Ms
Unfactored moment
Supp-L/R
Left and right support
SWfin, SWrel
Self-weight at final and at release
Vs
Unfactored shear
y
p
o
Structural Analysis
Prestress Loss Computations
n
o
Area of the non-composite transformed section
Accel
Accelerated
Factor obtained from PCI Handbook, 5th Ed, Table 4.7.2
CR
Creep of the concrete
ES
Elastic shortening
fcds
Stress in concrete due to all superimposed dead loads
Net compressive stress in concrete at release
a
u
fcir
fcr
fpi
fst
l
a
i
t
Net compressive stress in concrete at time t
Total stress in the prestressing strand at tensioning
Stress in the strand at time t
Moment of inertia of the non-composite transformed section
Factor used to calculate fcir
Kcr
Factor used to calculate creep
Kes
Factor used to calculate elastic shortening
Kre
Ksh
Factor used to calculate shrinkage
Mbm
Moment caused by the member dead load at release
Mcdl
Moment caused by composite dead loads
MCF
Factor to account for the effect of age at release on creep
Mdl
Moment caused by non-composite dead loads (excluding topping)
Mll
Moment caused by live loads
Mtopg
Moment cause by topping
PCR
Amount of creep over time interval t1 to t
Kcir
v
E

/ A1-5
Appendix One
Pi
Total force in the prestressing strand at tensioning
PSH
Amount of shrinkage over time interval t1 to t
RE
Relaxation of the prestressing tendons
SCF
Factor to account for the effect of size and shape on creep
SH
Shrinkage
SSF
Accounts for the effect of size and shape on shrinkage
t1, t
Beginning and end of time interval
UCR
Ultimate loss of prestress due to creep of concrete
USH
Ultimate loss of prestress due to shrinkage of concrete
V/S ratio
Volume to Surface ratio
A1, A2
Loaded area at the bearing surface and in the precast member
Acr
Area of the assumed crack plane
An
Area of reinforcement required to resist axial tension
Ash, min
Vertical area of reinforcement across horizontal cracks
Avf
Area of steel perpendicular to the assumed crack plane
Cr
Reduction coefficient
mu-eff
Effective shear friction coefficient
phiVn
Design bearing strength
Distance from end of member to centerline of bearing
Bearing Steel
Vu-max
w
i
t
a
u
Vu
n
o
y
p
o
Factored stem reaction at the support
Maximum allowable support reaction (ACI 318-99/02, Art. 10.17)
Width of bearing area measured parallel to member span
Minimum required concrete compressive strength at release
Release and Final Stresses
l
a
f'ci-min
Provided
Required
Depth of compression block obtained from strain compatibility
Beta1
Factor defined in ACI 318-99/02, Art. 10.2.7.3
bfl
Width of the compression flange
bweb
Web width adjacent to the compression flange
Depth to neutral axis obtained from strain compatibility
c/dt
Ratio of depth of neutral axis to depth of extreme steel in tension
Controls
Controlling factor in strain compatibility (COMP or TENS in ACI 318-99 mode

or COMP, TENS, TRANS in ACI 318-05 mode
Prvd
v
E
Reqd
Ultimate Strength

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix One
cor
Maximum depth to neutral axis for over-reinforced condition
d, d'
Depth to c.g. of mild tension or compression steel
dsc
Average depth to tension steel based on strain compatibility
dt
Distance from extreme compression fiber to extreme tension steel
fps
Calculated fps from stress-strain curve for strand
fse
Effective prestressing force after all losses
Mor
Calculated capacity for over-reinforced section
Msc
Capacity of section obtained from strain compatibility
phiMn/Mu
Ratio of the capacity of section to the applied moment
pMn
Adopted value of nominal moment capacity
Rho-bal
Balanced reinforcement ratio
Rho-calc
Calculated reinforcement ratio.
Rho-max
Maximum allowable reinforcement ratio
Rho-min
Minimum required reinforcement ratio
tfl
Thickness of the compression flange
S-req
Required spacing of reinforcement (ACI 318-99/02, Arts. 10.6.4 and 18.4.4).
# of Steel
Number of rebar of strand or their summation depending upon what controls
cc
Clear cover to extreme tension steel
Control
Reports what steel is closest to the extreme tension face
Crack Control
s-prov
s-req
TensWid
l
a
Cracking Load
i
t
a
u
fs, Dfps
n
o
y
p
o
Stress in rebar or strand closest to the extreme tension face
Provided spacing of steel
Required spacing of steel
Width of the section in tension that will be checked for crack control
Modulus of rupture (ACI 318-99/02, Art. 9.5.2.3)
phi*Mn
Adopted value of nominal moment capacity
phi*Mn/Mcr
Ratio of the capacity of section to the cracking moment
Al
Calculated longitudinal steel
AtC
Calculated area of vertical reinforcement to resist torsion
Av+2At
Adopted area of reinforcement to resist shear and torsion
Av+2At, min
Minimum required combined shear and torsion reinforcement
AvC
Calculated area of vertical reinforcement to resist shear
Av-prvd
Provided area of vertical shear reinforcement to resist shear and torsion
bw
Web width considered effective to resist shear
fr
v
E
Vertical Shear and Torsion

/ A1-7
Appendix One
Depth from compression face to c.g. of tension steel
fpc
Compressive stress in concrete at centroid of cross-section
f-act
Actual stress in concrete due to combined shear and torsion (ACI 318-99/02,
Art. 11.6.3.1)
f-alw
Total allowed stress in concrete due to shear and torsion (ACI 318-99/02, Art.
y
p
o
11.6.3.1)
Md
Moment at section due to unfactored dead load
Mmax
Maximum factored moment at a section (Mu-Md)
P-eff
Effective prestressing force after all losses
phi*Vn/Vu
Flagged by asterisk if ratio is smaller than 1.0. Vs computed using only

provided stirrup
rho-w
Mild reinforcement ratio obtained from As/(bw*d)
s-max
Maximum allowable spacing of shear steel
s-prvd
Spacing of stirrups provided at specific point
Tc
(Only applicable to PCI method) Nominal torsional moment strength of

concrete under pure torsion
Tc
(Only applicable to PCI method) Nominal torsional moment strength of

concrete under combined shear and torsion, computed per PCI equation 4.4.4
Tlim
Limiting value of torsion below which torsional steel is not required (ACI 31899/02, Art. 11.6.1)
Tnmax
(Only applicable to PCI method) Maximum nominal torsional moment,

computed per PCI equation 4.4.2
Tumin
(Only applicable to PCI method) Minimum torsional moment, computed per

PCI equation 4.4.1
i
t
a
u
:
(Only applicable to PCI method) Nominal shear strength of concrete under

pure torsion
(Only applicable to PCI method) Nominal shear strength of concrete under

combined shear and torsion, computed per PCI equation 4.4.5
Flexural shear resisted by concrete (ACI 318-99/02, Eq. 11-10)
Web shear resisted by concrete (ACI 318-99/02, Eq. 11-12)
Shear force at section due to unfactored dead load
Vi
Factored shear force coincident with Mmax (Vu-Vd)
Vp
Vertical component of effective prestress force
Vs
Portion of applied shear resisted by steel
Vs, max
Maximum allowable shear resisted by steel
x1
(Only applicable to PCI method) Short side of closed tie
x2y
(Only applicable to PCI method) x2y as in equation 4.4.1
y1
(Only applicable to PCI method) Long side of closed tie
Ycrit
Location of fpc in ACI 318-99/02, Eq. 11-12
Required horizontal shear steel based on roughened interface
Vc
Vc
l
a
Vci
Vcw
Vd
v
E
n
o
Horizontal Shear
Ahr

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix One
Ahs
Required horizontal shear steel based on smooth interface
Ayh, min
Minimum required horizontal shear steel
Bv
Width of member used to resist horizontal shear
Vnh
Nominal horizontal shear
Vnh, max
Maximum allowable horizontal shear
Icr
Cracked moment of inertia
Ie
Effective moment of inertia used to compute deflections
Ig
Gross moment of inertia
Ma
Cumulative moment at a section
Mc0
Moment which produces zero curvature
Md0
Moment which produces zero deflection
Ig/Ie
Deflection multiplier used when Ie > Ig
Prest
Prestressing
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E

/ A1-9
Appendix One
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
Hand Calculations
for Selected Items
Hand Calculations for Selected Items
y
p
o
Tutorial: Design of a 8DT24 Double Tee
n
o
Member Section - Precast
i
t
a
u
FIGURE A2-1. Precast Section
l
a
Section Properties
Section above is a standard PCI section with the following section properties.
=
401 in2
20985 in4
Yb
17.15 in
Yt
6.85 in
v
E
For analysis, the member is divided into five zones referenced from the left end. Note
that the circular opening is converted into an equivalent rectangular opening.
PRESTOv8.6 Hand Calculations for Selected Items

/ A2-1
Appendix Two
Zone
Location
Openings
0 to 14 ft
None
14 to 16 ft
12 in 24 in
16 to 19.5 ft
None
19.5 to 20.5 ft
24 in 24 in (equivalent rectangular)
20.5 to 50 ft
None
y
p
o
Zones 1, 3, 5 have the section properties listed above. While section properties for Zones 2 and 4 are
different.
Zone 2
24 in
401 + (-12) 2 = 377.0 in2
Yb
401(17.15) + (-24)23
= 16.78 in
377
- 12(2) 3
+ [401(17.15) 2 + (-24)(23) 2 ] - [(410 - 24)(16.78) 2 ] = 20103 in 4
20985 +
12
24 in
401 + (-24) 2 = 353.0 in2
Yb
401(17.15) + (-48)23
= 16.35 in
377
- 12(2) 3
+ [401(17.15) 2 + (-48)(23) 2 ] - [(410 - 48)(16.35) 2 ] = 19103 in 4
20985 +
12
i
t
Zone 4
a
u
l
a
v
E
n
o
A2-2 / Hand Calculations for Selected Items

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
Member Section - Composite
y
p
o
FIGURE A2-2. Composite Section
Acomp = Aprec + nAtop where n =Etop/Eprec
Yb-comp =
A prec (Yprec ) + nA top (Ytop )
n
o
A prec + nA top
Icomp = Iprec + Itop + [Aprec(Yprec)2 + nAtop (Ytop)2] - [(Aprec + nAtop) (Yb-comp)2]
i
t
1.5
Zones 1, 3 and 5
(150) (33) (3000)

(150)1.5 (33) 5500
a
u
Acomp =
401 + (0.738) (2) (96) = 542.8 in2
Yb-comp =
(401)(17.15) + (0.738)(192)(25)
542.8
l
a
Icomp
v
E
Zones 2 and 4
= 0.7385
= 19.20 in
(0.7385 )(96 )( 2) 3
2
2
2
20985 +
+ [( 401)(17 .15) + (0.7385 )(192 )( 25) ] - (542 .8)(19 .20 )
12
= 27487 in4
Hcomp =
24 + 2 = 26 in
Since there is no topping in these sections, the composite section properties are the
same as the precast section properties.
Precast Data
Shear width = combined average width of stems

/ A2-3
Appendix Two
3.75 + 5.75 2
= 9.5 in
Web extent = out to out distance at tops of exterior stems

=
y
p
o
48.00 + 5.75 2
= 53.75 in
Volume/surface ratio is approximated by the area of the section divided by the

perimeter of the section. V/S is used in loss calculation.
Allowable Concrete
Stresses
Release
401.00
[2(96.00 + 24.00) + 2(22.00)]
V/S
f'c
5500 psi
Wc
150 pcf
f'ci
4500 psi
f'ct
3000 psi
i
t
n
o
a
u
f ci'
Tension at other places of member = 3
l
a
v
E
Compression = 0.6 0 (fci) = 0.60 (4500) =2700.0 psi (+)

Tension at ends of member = 6
Final Conditions
1.41
(ACI 18.4.1)
= 402.5 psi (-)
f ci'
= 201.2 psi (-)
Compression for topping due to prestressed plus sustained loads

'
= 0.45 ( f ct ) = 0.45 (3000) = 1350.0 psi (+)
(ACI 18.4.2)
Compression for precast due to prestressed plus sustained loads

'
= 0.45 ( f c ) = 0.45 (5500) = 2475.0 psi (+)
Compression for topping due to prestressed plus total load

'
= 0.60 ( f ct ) = 0.60 (3000) = 1800 psi (+)
Compression for precast due to prestressed plus total load

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
'
= 0.60 ( f c ) = 0.60 (5500) = 3300 psi (+)
'
Tension for topping = 6 ( f ct ) = 0.45 ( 3000 ) = 328.6 psi (-)
y
p
o
'
Tension for precast = 6 ( f c ) = 0.45 ( 5500 ) = 445.0 psi (-)
Concrete Data
1.5
'
Modulus of elasticity = w c ( f c )
(ACI 8.5.1)
Ec
(150)1.5 (33) ( 5500 ) = 4496 ksi
Eci
(150)1.5 (33) ( 4500 ) = 4067 ksi
Ect
(150)1.5 (33) ( 3000 ) = 3321 ksi
n
o
i
t
Prestressed Strand
fpy, the yield strength, is specified as 90% of tensile strength, fpu, for the low-relaxation
strands.
0.9 fpu = 0.9 (270) = 243 ksi
a
u
(ACI 18.5.1)
Tension in each strand = 0.75 (270) 0.153 = 30.98 kip

The depressed strands have a profile as shown in Fig. A2-3.
l
a
v
E
FIGURE A2-3. Strand Profile

/ A2-5
Appendix Two
The following table summarizes the depressed distance, depressed angle and the
vertical component of the prestressing force.
Group
Depressed Dis.
x (in)
Tan (Theta)
x/300
0.0
0/300
Theta
Sin Vertical Component
(Degrees) (Theta)
(kips)
0.0
0.0
4.0 - 2.5 = 1.5
1.5/300
0.29
0.005
14.0 - 3.0 = 11.0
11.0/300
2.10
0.037
16.0 - 3.5 = 12.5
12.5/3000
2.39
0.042
0.0
y
p
o
0.16
1.14
1.29
Each strand has two vertical components and each group has two strands.
Total depression force = 2 (2 (0 + 0.16 + 1.14 + 1.29)) = 10.3 k
Unreinforced Section Properties

The following table gives the precast section properties.
Zone Area, in2
Self-Weight, plf
I (in4)
n
o
C
Bf, in
401
w1 = (401/144)150 = 417.7 20985
377
w2 = (377/144)150 = 392.7 20103 96 - 12 = 84 16.78
401
353
410
Reinforced Section Property Data
w3 = 417.7
a
u
i
t
20985
96
Yb, in
96
17.15
17.15
w4 = (353/144)150 = 367.7 19103 96 - 24 = 72 16.35

w5 = 417.7
20985
96
17.15
No mild reinforcement is present. Therefore, section properties are identical to those in

unreinforced sections.
l
a
v
E
Analysis
FIGURE A2-4. Beam Loading
The structural analysis is performed at the different checkpoints specified to obtain the
design moment and shear values. Sample hand calculations at the 25' location are
shown below.

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
General equation for 25 ft location is:
R1 at release =
[29.5w 5 (14.75) + w 4 (30.0) + 3.5w 3 (32.25) + 2w 2 (35.0) + 14w1 (43)]

50
y
p
o
R1 at final =
[29.0w5 (14.5)+ w4 (29.5)+ 3.5w3 (31.75)+ 2w2 (34.5)+14w1 (42.5)- 0.5w1(0.25)]

49
M at release = 25 R1 - 14w1 (18) - 2w2 (10) - 3.5w3 (7.25) - w4 (5) - 4.5w5 (2.25)
M at final = 24.5R1 - 14w1 (18) - 2w2 (10) - 3.5w3(7.25) - w4 (5) - 4.5w5 (2.25)
V at final = R1 - 14w1 - 2w2 - 3.5w3 - w4 - 4.5w5
Self-weight
Using the values of (w) on page A3-6, in the equation above, the moments and shears
are calculated as follows:
n
o
R1 at release = 10.378 k
R2 at release = 10.377 k
Mswrel, self-weight at release = 129.7 kft
i
t
Mswfin, self-weight at final = 124.5 kft
Vswfin, self-weight at final = 0.0355 kft
Topping
a
u
The topping values in the different zones along the length of the member are listed
below, where
l
a
v
E
Topg wt (plf) =
(96)(2)(150)
= 200plf
144
Zone
Topg wt (plf)
200
200
Based on the above values, the following quantities were calculated using the
equations listed above.
R1
Mtopg =
Vtopg
4.14 k
49.1 kft
0.44 k

/ A2-7
Appendix Two
Superimposed Dead
Load on Composite
(SD)
The superimposed dead load values in the different zones are listed in the following
table.
Zone
SD wt (plf)
80
70
80
60
80
y
p
o
A sample equation for SD wt (plf) for Zone 1 is:
(0.01)(1000)
(96)
lb
= 80
ft
12
Based on the above table, the following quantities were calculated using the equations
listed above.
Live Loads (LL)
R1
1.974 k
MSD
23.7 kft
VSD
0.014 k
n
o
i
t
The live load values in the different zones are listed in the following table.
Zone
a
u
l
a
LL wt (plf)
400
350
400
300
400
A sample equation for LL wt (plf) for Zone 2 is:
v
E
Total Moment and

Shears At Final
Conditions
(0.05)(1000)
(84)
lb
= 350
ft
12
Based on the above table, the following quantities were calculated using the equations
listed above.
R1
9.869 k
MLL
118.3 kft
VLL
0.070 k
Ms
Msw-fin + Mtopg + Mdl + Mll
Ms
315.5 kft
Vs
Vs-sw + Vs-topg + Vs-dl + Vs-ll

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
Vs
0.6 kft
Mu
1.4 (Msw-fin + Mtopg + Mdl) + 1.7 Mll
Mu
477.2 kft
Vu
1.4(Vs-sw + Vs-topg + Vs-dl) + 1.7 Vs-ll
Vu
0.8 kft
y
p
o
Prestress Losses
The PCI method is used to calculate the prestress losses at the 25' location.
At final conditions: TL = ES + CR + SH + RE
ES
Kes
1.0 for pretensioned members
Eps
modulus of elasticity for prestressing tendons
Eci
modulus of elasticity of concrete at time prestress is applied
fcir
Kcir ((Pi / Ag) + (Pi e2) / Ig) - Mg e / Ig
Kcir
Pi
initial prestress force (after anchorage seating loss)
8 (0.153) (0.75) 270
247.86 k (assume no loss)
eccentricity = Yb - Ycgs = 17.15 - 2.75 = 14.40 in
area of gross concrete section = 401 in2
moment of inertia = 20985 in4
bending moment due to dead weight = 129.7 kft
Ig
Mg
fcir
(PCI Eq. 4.7.2)
E ci
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
Ag
v
E
K es E ps f cir
(PCI Eq. 4.7.1)
247860
(247860)(14.4) 2 129700 (14.4)(12)
0.9
+
20985
20985
401
(PCI Eq. 4.7.3)
= 1692.9
psi
ES
CR
1.0(29.0 10 6 )(1692.9)
4.067 10 6
= 12071.9 psi
Kcr (Es / Ec) (fcir - fcds)

/ A2-9
Appendix Two
Kcr
2.0 for normal weight concrete
fcds
Msd (e) / Ig
49.1 (12000) 14.4 24 (12000) (19.20 - 2.75)

+
= 574.3 psi
20985
27488
y
p
o
4.7.5)
29.0 10 6
2.0
(1692.9 - 574.3) =14429.5 psi
6
4.496 10
CR
SH
shrinkage of concrete
(8.2 10 -6) Ksh Es (1 - 0.06 V/S) (100 - RH)
Ksh
V/S
volume to surface ratio
RH
average ambient relative humidity = 75%
SH
(8.2 10 -6) 1.0 (29 106) (1 - 0.06 (1.43) (100 - 75) = 5434.9 psi
RE
[Kre - J (SH + CR + ES)] C
Kre
5000, from Table 4.7.1
1.0, for fpi/fpu = 0.75, from Table 4.7.2
n
o
i
t
a
u
v
E
(PCI Eq. 4.7.6)
(PCI Eq. 4.7.6)
(PCI Eq. 4.7.7)
0.04, from Table 4.7.1
RE
[5000 - 0.04 (5434.9 + 14429.5 + 12071.9)] 1.0 = 3722.5 psi
ES + RE + CR + SH
12071.9 + 3722.5 + 14429.5 + 5434.9
35658.9 psi
At final:
l
a
(PCI Eq.
TL
% loss =
TL
35658.9
=
0.75(270000)
0.75(270000)
= 17.61%
At release conditions:
TL
ES + RET
RET at final, t=100,000 hours

fst
0.75 (270000) = 202500 psi
fpy
0.9 (270000) = 243000 psi

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
RET
log24t - log24t i f st
f st
( f 0.55)
10
py
f st
202.5
0.55
0.55
=
f py
243.0
t1
RET
202500
REmax =
3722.5 psi
y
p
o
= 0.28
1/24
log(100000)
0.28 = 28350 psi
10
Ratop
REmax /RET = 0.1313
At t
24 hours
RET
202500
n
o
log(24)
0.28 = 7826 psi
10
i
t
Adjusted= 7826 (0.1313) = 1027.6 psi

TL
12071.9 + 1027.6 = 13099.5 psi

TL
0.75(270000)
a
u
% loss =
Precast and Composite Section Properties
l
a
= 6.47%
The precast and composite section properties at locations 1.5' and 25.0' are summarized
in the following table.
Loc.
(ft)
v
E
Miscellaneous
Section Properties
Computations
Ac
(in2)
A
(in2)
I
(in4)
Ic
(in4)
Yb
(in)
Ybc
(in)
Yt
(in)
Ytc
(in)
1.5
401.0
542.8
20985
27487.7
17.15
19.20
6.85
4.80
25.0
401.0
542.8
20985
27487.7
17.15
19.20
6.85
4.80
At 1.5 ft and 25.0 ft locations:
Sb
I
Yb
Sbc
I
Ybc
= 1223.6 in3
= 1431.6 in3

/ A2-11
Appendix Two
St
I
Yt
Stc
I
Ytc
= 3063.5 in3
y
p
o
= 5726.6 in3
At Loc = 1.5 ft:
Ycgs
9.0 - (1.5/25.0)(9.0 - 2.75) = 8.63 in
Yb - Ycgs = 8.53 in
ec
Ybc - Ycgs = 10.57 in
At Loc = 25.0 ft:
Ycgs
9.0 - (25.0/25.0)(9.0 - 2.75) = 0.75 in
Yb - Ycgs = 14.4 in
ec
Ybc - Ycgs = 16.45 in
Calculation of Member Stresses

Release Stresses:
Precast Section Only
n
o
i
t
Pi = fpu no. of strands area of strands (1 - initial losses)

Transfer length = 50 strand diameters = 50 (0.5) = 25 in = 2.08 ft
a
u
Note prestress is partially transferred at 1.5 ft

Loc. ft
1.50
l
a
25.0
Pi
0.75 (270.0) 8 (0.153) (1 - 0.0494) [(1.5) 12 / 25] = 169.64 k

0.75 (270.0) 8 (0.153) (1 - 0.065) = 231.75 k
Note the positive sign stands for compression, negative sign stands for tension.
For Loc = 1.5 ft:
v
E
ftop, due to prestress=-Pi e/St + Pi/A = -49 psi

fbot, due to prestress=Pi e/Sb + Pi/A = 1605 psi
Msw
15.1 kft
ftop, due to self-weight=(12) (1000) (Msw) / St = 59 psi

fbot, due to self-weight=(12) (1000) (Msw) / Sb = -148 psi
ftop, total at release=-49 + 59 = 10 psi
fbot, total at release=1605 - 148 = 1457 psi
Compare these total stresses with the stress limits for stresses in concrete immediately
after prestress transfer, as in Art. 18.4.1 of ACI 318-99 code.

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
Compression Limit = 0.60(fci) = (0.60) (4500) = 2700 psi
OK
For Loc = 25.0 ft:
ftop, due to prestress=-Pi e/St + Pi/A = -512 psi

fbot, due to prestress=Pi e/Sb + Pi/A = 3306 psi
Msw
y
p
o
129.7 kft

ftop, total at release=-512 + 508 = -4 psi
fbot, total at release=3306 Compression Limit, as per Art. 18.4.1 of ACI 318-99 = 2700 psi
Final Stresses:
Precast Section Only
Po = fpu no. of strands area of strands (1 - final losses)
n
o
OK
Transfer length = 50 strand diameters = 50 (0.5) = 25 in = 2.08 ft

Note prestress is partially transferred at 1.5 ft
Loc. ft
i
t
Pi
1.50
0.75 (270.0) 8 (0.153) (1 - 0.168) [(1.5) 12 / 25] = 148.48 k
25.0
0.75 (270.0) 8 (0.153) (1 - 0.176) = 204.23 k
For Loc = 1.5ft:
a
u
ftop, due to prestress=-Po e/St + Po/A = -43 psi

fbot, due to prestress=Po e/Sb + Po/A = 1405 psi
Based on the support conditions at final, Msw = 10.0 kft
l
a

v
E
Due to topping self weight: Mtopg = 3.9 kft

ftop, due to topping=(12) (1000) Mtopg / St = 15 psi
fbot, due to topping=(12) (1000) Mtopg / Sb = -38 psi
For Loc = 25.0 ft:
ftop, due to prestress=-Po e/St + Po/A = -451 psi

fbot, due to prestress=Po e/Sb + Po/A = 2915 psi
Based on the support conditions at final, Msw = 124.5 kft

/ A2-13
Appendix Two
Due to topping self weight: Mtopg = 49.1 kft

ftop, due to topping self weight=(12) (1000) Mtopg / St = 192 psi
fbot, due to topping self weight=(12) (1000) Mtopg / Sb = -482 psi
Final Stresses: Composite Section
y
p
o
Mdlcomp
(kft)
Loc
(ft)
Ytt = Hc - Ybc
(in)
Stt = Ic / Ytt
(in3)
1.5
26.0 -19.20=6.80
4046.2
1.9
25.0
26.0-19.20=6.80
4046.2
23.7
For Loc = 1.5ft:
Moment due to SDL on composite, MSD = 1.9 kft
9.4
118.3
ftop, due to SDL on composite=(12) (1000) (MSD) / St = 4 psi
fbot, due to SDL on composite=(12) (1000) (MSD) / Sb = -16 psi
n
o
Mll
(kft)
fttop, due to SDL on composite=(12) (1000) (MSD) (Ect / Ec) / Stt = 4 psi
Moment due to live load (LL) on composite, MLL = 9.4 kft
ftop, due to LL on composite=(12) (1000) (MLL) / St = 20 psi
i
t
fbot, due to LL on composite=(12) (1000) (MLL / Sb = -79 psi

For Loc = 25.0 ft:
a
u
Moment due to SDL on composite, MSD = 23.7 kft

ftop, due to SDL on composite=(12) (1000) (MSD) / St = 50 psi
l
a
fbot, due to SDL on composite=(12) (1000) (MSD) / Sb = -201 psi
Moment due to live load (LL) on composite, MLL = 118.3 kft
v
E
ftop, due to LL on composite=(12) (1000) (MLL) / St = 248 psi

fbot, due to LL on composite=(12) (1000) (MLL / Sb = -996 psi
Total ft, psi, at the final condition.

ft
ftprestress + ftselfwt + ftdl + fttopg + ftdlcomp + ftll
Total fb, psi, at the final condition.

fb
fbprestress + fbselfwt + fbdl + fbtopg + fbdlcomp + fbll

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
Total ftt, psi, at the final condition.

ftt
fttdlcomp + fttll
The table below summarizes the calculated stresses.

Loc. (ft)
ft (psi)
fb (psi)
ftt (psi)
1.5
35.0
1174
25.0
25.0
527.0
20
311
y
p
o
Note that all of the above stresses are within the allowable stresses based on ACI 318-99,
Art. 18.4.2.
Strand Development
Ld
(fps - 2/3 (fse)) db
fps
stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal strength, approximately

equals fpu
fse
effective stress in prestressed reinforcement after losses
0.75 (270) (1 - 0.176)
166.8 ksi
[270 - 2/3 (166.9)] 0.5 = 79.4 in
Ld
n
o
(ACI 12.9)
i
t
Ultimate Strength
a
u
The ultimate moment is calculated using the strain compatibility method. Strand is
initially tensioned to 75% of fpu.
After final losses of 17.61%, effective stress in prestressing steel is
fse
l
a
se
v
E
(1 - 0.1761) (0.75) (270) = 166.84 ksi

f se
166.84
= 0.00575
=
E ps
29000
The strain diagram for this situation is illustrated in Fig. A2-5 .

0.003
96"
c
2"
24"
eps
esa
ese
FIGURE A2-5. Strain Diagram for Ultimate Strength

/ A2-15
Appendix Two
dp
sa + 0.003
=
0.003
c
sa
ps
0.003d p
c
0.003 (26 2.75)

0.003
c
0.06975
0.003
c
y
p
o
0.003
sa + se
n
o
0.06975
+ (0.00575 - 0.003)
c
Note that PRESTO iterates by trial and error to find the correct value for (c). Try c =
1.58in.
i
t
ps
0.06975
+ 0.0027 = 0.0468
c
fps
0.04
270
= 269 ksi
0.0468 - 0.007
1 c = (0.85) (1.58) = 1.34
(0.85) (3) (1.34) (96) = 328 kips
Aps fps = (0.153) (8) (269) = 329.56 kips C
Mn
A ps f ps d p
2
a
u
l
a
v
E
OK
1.34
(0.9) (1.224) (269) 23.25
= 6691.14 kip-in
2
6691.14
12
= 557.5 kip-ft

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
M n
Mu
557.5
477.2
= 1.17 > 1.0
OK
Cracking Load
y
p
o
Cracking section is at 12.50 ft.

phiMn = 480.25 kft
Cracking stress =
f c'
7.5
= 7.5 5500 = 556 psi

Stress (psi)
-909
92.7
Topping
-334
34.1
Dead Load
-149
17.1
1069
144.5
n
o
27487
= 1431.6 in3
19.20
Sb
= 1223.8 in3
l
a
v
E
Vertical Shear
i
t
a
u
Mcr
2461
Self weight
Sbc
Moment (kft)
Prestress
Total
Mcr
(ACI 9.5.2.3)
P Pe
Sbc + +
A Sb
fr - Muc Sbc 1
Sb
338.40 kft
phi M n
= 1.42
M cr
Vu
factored shear force.
Mu
ultimate design moment.
bw
shear width.
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal

tension reinforcement, but not less than 0.8h.
Vd
shear force due to unfactored dead load.

/ A2-17
Appendix Two
Md
moment due to unfactored dead load.
Vi
factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads

occurring simultaneously with Mmax.
Mmax
maximum factored moment due to externally applied loads.
Mc
moment causing flexural cracking due to externally applied loads.
Vci
nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking

results from combined shear and moment.
Ycrit
(used for computation of fpc, resultant compressive stress) centroid of

composite section, or at junction of web and flange when the centroid
lies within the flange.
fpc
compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all prestress

losses) at centroid of cross section resisting externally applied loads
or at junction of web and flange when the centroid lies within the
flange. (In a composite section, or at junction of web and flange, due
to both prestress and moments resisted by prestress member acting
alone)
Vp
vertical component of effective prestress force at section.
Vcw
nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking

results from excessive principle tensile stress in web.
Vc
nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
Vs-max =
l
a
v
E
maximum shear strength which may be provided by shear

reinforcement.
Vs
nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement.
Aps
area of prestressing steel.
Av-min =
area of shear reinforcement, per ACI 318-99, 11.5.5.3.
Av
area of shear reinforcement per foot of length.
Smax
maximum spacing for shear reinforcement.
In the following table, the calculations were done at 1.5 ft from left end.
Loc (ft)
Vu (k)
Mu (kft)
bw (in)
d (in)
Vd = Vsw+Vtopg+Vsd (k)
1.5
37.4
38
9.5
19.2
15.4
Md
Msw + Mtopg + Msd = 9.97 + 3.92 + 1.91 = 15.7 kft
Mmax
Mu - Md = 38.0 - 15.7 = 22.3 kft
Vi
Vu - Vd = 37.4 - 15.4 = 22.0 k
Mcr
(I / Yc) [6 (
f c' ) + fpe - fd]

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
fpe
compressive stress in concrete extreme fiber due to effective prestress

forces only.
fd
stress due to unfactored dead load at extreme fiber where tensile stress
is caused by externally applied loads.
moment of inertia.
Yt
distance from centroid axis to extreme tension fiber.
Mcr
Vci
27488
6 5500 + 1404 (97 + 38 + 16)
19.20
12000
0.6 f c' b w d + Vd +
Vi M cr
M max
n
o
Note that Vci should not be less than 1.7
f c' bwd
= 202.6 kft
Vci
0.6 5500
9.5(19.20)
22.0(202.6)
+ 15.4 +
= 223.4 k
1000
22.3
Vci
1.7 5500
9.5(19.20)
1000
fpc
i
t
a
u
l
a
Po
fpc
y
p
o
= 23.0 k
Po / A + [A + [-Po e (Ybc - Yb) + (Msw + M topg) 12000 (Ybc - Yb)] / I
Transfer Length= 50
1
= 25 in
2
At 1.5 ft effective steel
v
E
Aps-eff =
1.5 12
(1.22) = 0.8784 in2
25
(1 - 0.1679) 0.8784 0.75 270 = 148.01 k
148010 [-148010(8.53)(19.20 17.15) + (9.97 + 3.92) 12000 (19.20 17.15)]

+
401
20985
Vp
262 psi
147.05 Sin () = 3.06 k

/ A2-19
Appendix Two
Vcw
=
=
(3.5
f c' + 0.3f pc b w d + Vp
(3.5
(ACI 11.4.2.2)
5500 + 0.3(262)) 9.5(19.2)

+ 3.06
1000
y
p
o
64.74 k
Vc is the lesser of Vci and Vcw

Vc
Vsmax =
64.74 k
Vs
Av fyd / s
Vs
0.0 as Vc > Vu, (Av = 0)
Aps
8 (0.153) = 1.22 in2
A vmin
=
s
v
E
n
o
i
t
50b w s
=
fy
a
u
A vmin
=
s
l
a
8 5500 9.5 19.2

1000
8 f c' b w d =
A ps f pu
80f y d
50(9.5) 12
60000
d
bw
= 0.095
= 108.2 k
in 2
ft
1.22(270000) 12
80 (60000) 19.2
(ACI 11.5.5.3)
19.2
in 2
= 0.061
9.5
ft
(ACI 11.5.5.4)
Av
2
0.06 in
Smax
(3 /4) h = 18 in
Vnh
factored shear force acting on composite section only.
bv
width of cross section at contact surface being investigated for

horizontal shear
ft
Horizontal Shear
Avhmin =
minimum area of horizontal shear steel required.
Ahs
area of horizontal shear steel required for smooth contact surface.
Ahr
area of horizontal shear steel required for roughed contact surface.
Vnh
(1.4 Vssd + 1.7 Vssl) /

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
At Loc = 1.5 ft:
Vnh
[1.4 (1.854 + 1.7 (9.269)] / 0.85 = 21.59 k
bv
96.0 in
Avh-min =
y
p
o
50 b w s
fy
A vh-min 50 b w s
50 9.5
=
=
= 0.09
s
fy
60000
Ahs
Avhmin = 0.095 in2/ft
Ahr
0.0 in2/ft since Vnh req'd < 80 bvd (Vnh-min) in2/ft
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E

/ A2-21
Appendix Two
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Two
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E

/ A2-23
Appendix Two
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Three
Hand Calculations
for Torsion
Hand Calculations for Torsion
y
p
o
Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam
This appendix illustrates the shear and torsion design of an L beam 18LB40 on
n
o
a 30ft span subjected to eccentric point loads on it. *A 2" topping is present
only at the top of beam. (Figs. A3-1 and A3-2) This section provides hand
calculations, which explain how the shear and torsion design is implemented in
PRESTO. Please refer to data file Torsion.prt in the PRESTO/Examples
directory.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
FIGURE A3-1. Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam on 30 Ft. Span
* All ACI references for these hand calculations refer to the Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-99) and all references to PCI refer to
the PCI Design Handbook (6th Edition).
PRESTOv8.6 Hand Calculations for Torsion

/ A3-1
Appendix Three
y
p
o
FIGURE A3-2. Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam
Materials
fc = 5000 psi
Wc = 150 pcf
n
o
fct= 3500 psi
Wct = 150 pcf
Cover to stirrup center = 1.75"
Ec = 4286.8 psi
Ect = 3586.6 psi
i
t
Loads
DL = 14.5k and LL = 99k at 5', 15' and 25' from left end at 7.5 inch eccentricity.
Critical Section
a
u
h = 40 in
h
= 20 in
2
l
a
20 in from support = 20 + 3 = 23 in from end
v
E
loc =
23
= 1.92 ft
12
Analysis Results
Vsw
= 7.85k
Tsw
= 0 kft
Msw
= 13.92 kft
Vtopping
= 0.33k
Ttopping
= 0 kft
Mtopping
= 0.58 kft
VDL
= 1.31 k
TDL
= 0 kft
MDL
= 2.32 kft
VSD+SDS
= 21.75 k
T SD+SDS
= 13.59 kft
M SD+SDS
= 36.32 kft
A3-2 / Hand Calculations for Torsion

PRESTO v8.6
AppendixThree
VLL
= 14.85 k
TLL
= 9.28 kft
MLL
= 24.80 kft
Vu
= 68.97 k
Tu
= 34.81 kft
Mu
= 116.566 kft
Vd = 7.85 + 0.33 + 1.31 + 21.75 = 31.24k
Md = 13.92 + 0.58 + 2.32 + 36.32

= 53.14 kft
Vi = Vu - Vd
y
p
o
Mmax = Mu - Md
= 68.97 - 31.24
= 115.76 - 52.57
= 37.73k
= 63.19 kft
Prestressing
Aps = (6 + 6 + 6) 0.153 = 2.75 in2
Transfer Length = 50 0.5 = 25 in
Effective Area of Prestress:
Aps-eff =
n
o
1.92 12
2.75 = 2.54 in 2
25
i
t
Losses at current location at final = 24.98 %

Peff
24.98
0.75 1 270 2.54 = 385.9 k
100
a
u
Composite Section Properties
3586.6
= 0.837
4286.8
l
a
n=
This reduces the topping width to:
v
E
12 0.837 = 10.04 in
Ac = 18 16 + 24 12 + 10.04 2 = 596.08 in2
yc
Ic
18 16 8 + 24 12 (16 + 12) + 10.04 2 16 + 24 +

2
= 18.77 in
=
596.08
18 16 3
16
+ 18 16 18.77
12
2

/ A3-3
Appendix Three
12 24 3
24
+ 12 24 18.77
16
12
2
10.04 2 3
2
+ 10.04 2 18.77 24 16 = 87839.2 in 4

12
2
y
p
o
Stresses
Stresses at final at bottom after losses:
fprestress =
1922 psi (compression)
fsw
39 psi (tension)
fdl
6 psi (tension)
ftopping =
2 psi (tension)
fsd+sds =
93 psi (tension)
n
o
Total (Prestress + all dl) = 1922 - 39 - 6 - 2 - 93 = 1782 psi
i
t
Cracking Moment
l
a
Shear Design
v
E
Vci
I
6 f c' + f pe
y
87839.2
1
= 860.4 kft
6 5000 + 1782
18.77
12000
0.6 f c' bw dp + Vd +
Vci 1.7 f c' b w d p
a
u
Mcr
fd
Vz. (M cr )
M max
where
Vci
1.7 fc b w d p = 1.7 5000
12 36
= 51.9 k
1000
Therefore,

PRESTO v8.6
AppendixThree
Vci
0.6 5000 12 36
37.73
+ 31.24 +
860.4 = 563.3 k > 51.9 k
1000
63.19
Stress due to prestress and DL on precast at composite centroid:
y
p
o
Top Stress = -862 + 47 + 8 + 2 +105 = -699 psi

Bottom Stress = 1922 - 39 - 6 - 2 - 93 = 1782 psi
At 18.77 in from bottom:0
fpc
1782 + 699
(40 - 18.77 ) - 699 = 618 psi
40
Vcw
(3.5
Vc
sVc
f c' + 0.3f pc b w d + Vp
(3.5
n
o
5000 + 0.3 618) 12 36

+0
1000
i
t
187.0 k
smaller of Vci and Vcw
187.0 k
158.9k > Vu = 68.5 k, provide minimum shear reinforcement.
a
u
Vs max =
8 5000 36 12
= 244.4 k
1000
l
a
Torsion Design
Area enclosed by outside concrete perimeter:
v
E
Acp = 12 40 + 6 16 = 576 in2

Perimeter of outside concrete:
Pcp = 12 75
+ 40 + 18 + 16 + 6 + 24 = 116 in

/ A3-5
Appendix Three
y
p
o
n
o
FIGURE A3-3. Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam (Closed Stirrup)
i
t
Cover to Stirrup Center is 1.75"

Aoh
l
a
v
E
36.5 8.5 + (14.5 - 8.5) 12.5
385.25 in2
a
u
ph
Cracking Torsional
Moment
36.5 + 8.5 + (36.5 - 12.5) + (14.5 - 8.5) + 12.5 + 14.5
102 in
Tcr
576 2
1 + 618 = 120.3 kft
4 5000
116
4 5000
Tlim
0.85 120.3
= 25.5 kft
4
Tu
34.8 kft > 25.5 kft, so we require design for torsion
Aoh
(40 - 2 1.75) (12 - 2 1.75) + (16 - 2 1.75) 6 = 385.25 in2
Ao
0.85 385.25 = 327.46 in2
Ph
(40 - 2 1.75) + (18 - 2 1.75) + (16 -2 1.75) + 6 + 24 + (12 - 2

1.75)
102 in
37.5 degrees

PRESTO v8.6
AppendixThree
At
S
34.8 12000
in 2
in 2
= 0.01
= 0.12
2 0.85 60000 cot(37.5)
in
ft
A v 2A t
+
S
S
Check for Minimum

Transverse Steel
= 0.0 + 0.24 = 0.24
in 2
ft
y
p
o
A v + 2A t
in 2
in 2
12
= 0.01
= 0.12
> 50
S
60000
in
ft
At midspan Peff = 435.5 kips (from PRESTO)
fps
435.5
2.75
= 158 ksi > 108 = 0.8 fpu
Therefore, also check minimum steel as per Eq. 11-14:

A ps f pu
80f y d
Smax =
36
in 2
in 2
= 0.007
= 0.09
12
in
ft
i
t
Check for Spacing

Spacing for Shear
n
o
d
2.75 270
=
bn
80 60 36
3
3
h = 40 = 30 in
4
4
a
u
Smax = 24 in
'
Since Vs not > 4 f c bwd
l
a
Therefore, no need to reduce spacing.
Spacing for Torsion
v
E
Smax =
ph 102
=
= 12.75
8
8
Smax = 12 in
Use the lower Smax due to shear and torsion requirements.
Therefore, Smax = 12 in
Longitudinal Steel
For minimum longitudinal steel:
At
S
0.01
in 2
25bw
25 12
in 2
=
= 0.005
in
fy
60000
in

/ A3-7
Appendix Three
Almin
5 5000 576
60000
- 0.01 102
= 2.45 in 2
60000
60000
Al
0.01 102
60000
cot(37.5) 2 = 1.73 in 2
60000
y
p
o
Since Al < Almin, use Al = Almin

Therefore, Al = 2.45 in2
Compression in
Concrete
187.0 1000
Compression allowed = 0.85

+ 8 5000 = 849 psi
12 36
Compression present =
C
2
68.97 1000 34.81 12000 102
+
= 232 psi
12 36 1.7 385.25 2
n
o
Compression allowed > Compression present
OK
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Four
Strand and Rebar Properties
y
p
o
Strand and Rebar Properties
Strand Properties
fpu
(ksi)
Type
6/10
270
LL
0.217
270
SR
0.217
270
LL
0.192
i
t
6/10
9/16
9/16
1/2
a
u
1/2
1/2
7/16
l
a
v
E
n
o
Nominal Diameter
(in)
Area
(in2)
270
SR
0.192
270
LL
0.153
270
SR
0.153
250
SR
0.144
270
LL
0.115
7/16
270
SR
0.115
7/16
250
SR
0.108
3/8
270
LL
0.085
3/8
270
SR
0.085
3/8
250
SR
0.080
where LL = Low Relaxation and SR = Stress Relieved
PRESTOv8.6 Strand and Rebar Properties

/ A4-1
Appendix Four
Rebar Properties
Bar Size
Diameter (in)
Area (in2)
0.375
0.11
0.500
0.20
0.625
0.31
0.750
0.44
0.875
0.60
1.000
0.79
1.128
1.00
10
1.27
1.27
11
1.410
14
1.693
18
2.257
n
o
y
p
o
C
1.56
2.25
4.00
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
A4-2 / Strand and Rebar Properties

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Fi ve
Section Type and Dimensions
y
p
o
Section Type and Dimensions
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6 Section Type and Dimensions

/ A5-1
Appendix Five
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
A5-2 / Section Type and Dimensions

PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Six
References
y
p
o
References
Branson, Dan E. and Trost, Heinrich. Application of the I-Effective

Method in Calculating Deflections of Partially Prestressed
Members, PCI Journal, Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago,
IL, September-October 1982, pp. 62-77.
2.
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-99).

American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 1999.
3.
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-05).

American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 2005.
4.
CPCI Design Manual, Precast and Prestressed Concrete. Third

Edition. 1996.
v
E
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
1.
5.
Mast, Robert F. Analysis of Cracked Prestressed Concrete

Sections: A Practical Approach. PCI Journal, Prestressed Concrete
Institute, Chicago, IL, July-August 1988, pp. 80-91.
6.
Metric Design Manual, Precast and Prestressed Concrete. Second

Edition. Canadian Prestressed Concrete Institute, Ottawa, ON, 1987.
7.
Notes on ACI 318-95 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced

Concrete with Design Applications. Portland Cement Association,
Skokie, IL, 1996.
8.
PCI Committee on Prestress Losses, Recommendations for

Estimating Prestress Losses, PCI Journal, Prestressed Concrete
Institute, Chicago, IL, July-August 1975, pp. 43-75.
9.
PCI Design Handbook, Precast and Prestressed Concrete. Sixth

Edition. Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago, IL, 2004.
10. Seminar Notes on ACI 318-02 Code Revisions. Portland Cement

Association, Portland, OR, 2002.
11. Young, Warren C. Roark's Formulas for Stress and Strain. Sixth
Edition. McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1989.
12. A23.3-94 (Reaffirmed 2000) Design of Concrete Structures,
Canadian Standard Association, 1994.
PRESTOv8.6 References
/ A6-1
Appendix Six
13. General Instruction No. 2 for A23.3-94 Design of Concrete Structures,

Canadian Standard Association, 1994.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
A6-2 / References
PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Seven
Glossary
y
p
o
Glossary
Allowable Stresses:
While PRESTO computes a default table of allowable stresses at release and

final conditions, the user may override any or all values. A computed stress
that exceeds the corresponding allowable stress is flagged with an asterisk. In
ACI 318-05 mode, the user specifies limits that are used to classify a section as
U/T/C (Uncracked/Transition/Cracked) as well in allowable stress.
Alphanumeric:
Consisting of both alphabetic and numeric characters.
Analysis Locations:
User-specified locations, measured from the extreme left end of the beam,
where the analysis is to be performed.
Asterisk:
A warning flag issued when the stress at a location is above an allowable value,
a calculated moment capacity is below a required moment, or a specific
warning has been issued to the user.
l
a
Beta-1 (1):
v
E
i
t
a
u
Bar Size:
n
o
A standard numerical designation for rebar. Indicates the specific diameter and
cross-sectional area.
Factor defined in ACI 318-99, Art. 10.2.7.3, used in the calculation of the height
of the equivalent concrete compressive stress block in ultimate strength
calculations.
Bfl-bot, Bfl-top:
Widths of the bottom and top flanges of the precast section, respectively. Set
equal to zero if no flange exists.
Bilinear:
An idealized deflection method for prestressed members when loaded into the
cracking range.
Boundary Distance:
The boundary distances are the portions to the left and right of the centerline of
the member. Like tributary width, the boundary distances are used to convert
uniform loads to linear loads for the member being analyzed. PRESTO
accepts non-symmetrical boundary distances. Based on user choice, this also
modifies the section properties of the precast section if total boundary distance
is less than the section flange width.
PRESTOv8.6 Glossary
/ A7-1
Appendix Seven
c/dt:
PRESTO uses this to determine the behavior of a section in ACI 318-05 code. As per
the default values if this value is less than or equal to 0.375, the section is tension
controlled (TENS) and a phi value of 0.9 can be used. If this ratio is larger than 0.600,
the section is compression controlled (COMP) and a phi value of 0.65 should be used.
For intermediate values of this ratio, the section is in transition (TRANS) and the
program will compute the phi value.
Camber and
Deflection
Multipliers:
Component prestress uplift and deflection multipliers (see PCI Handbook, 5th edition).
Used to predict long-term time-dependent behavior.
Check point
Properties:
Non-composite and composite section properties computed at user-specified check

points. Both the slab and mild reinforcement are transformed.
Class:
ACI 318-05
Context Sensitive:
The help system for PRESTO is context sensitive; the information on the help screen
relates to the specific part of the program from which it was called.
Crack Control:
Codes requires a check of the spacing of steel for a section that cracks. In ACI 318-99,
this is required for all reinforced sections. In ACI 318-05, this is required for prestressed
concrete sections that crack as well as reinforced sections. S-req and s-prov are
computed. S-prov is flagged if it is more than s-req.
Crack Depth:
For a cracked section, this is reported as the depth from the extreme geometric tension
face. For a section with crack at bottom, it is the depth from the bottom of the
geometric section to a point of zero tension stress. For a section with crack at top, this
is the depth from the top of the section (precast or composite top) to the zero tension
stress level.
Cracked Section
Properties:
In ACI 318-05, if a precast/prestressed section gets cracked, PRESTO computes the

section properties for a cracked section. These are reported in a separate table as
effective properties. For an uncracked section, effective section properties are the same
as the gross section properties.
Current Data File:
Data File that is open for input.
Data File:
A disk file used by PRESTO to store information for a task created by a user.
y
p
o
requires precast/prestressed sections to be classified based on total tension

stress at final. Based on this classification, a precast section may be classified as
Uncracked (U), In Transition (T), or Cracked (C).
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
Data file List:
PRESTO maintains a list of the last five data files that you have opened. To reopen a
data file, you may select directly from this list.
Days to Topping,
Comp. DL:
Number of days between the release of the strand and the placement of the topping or
the addition of the composite dead load, respectively. Used for the time dependent loss
analysis.
Dead Load,
Composite:
Dead load defined by the user to act on the composite section.
A7-2 / Glossary
PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Seven
Dead Load, Noncomposite:
Dead load defined by the user to act on the bare precast section.
Debonding:
See shielding.
Default Directory:
Location where the program will store data files unless that location is explicitly
changed while saving newly created files.
Default File Name:
A disk file that contains user defined material properties, which are supplied when a
new data file is created.
Default Value:
The preset (usually the standard) value or option.
Depress Point:
Point at which the strand profile is depressed mechanically, as with a harping fork in a
double tee.
Development
Length:
Length of embedded reinforcement required to develop the design strength of the

reinforcement at a critical section.
Development Length
Multiplier:
A user defined number that determines how many computed development lengths are
required to fully develop the prestressing strand. The calculated development length
for all strands will be multiplied by this value.
Dialog Box:
A mini input screen produced by the program to obtain further information from the
user. Dialog boxes may contain several types of input fields.
Ec, Eci, Ect:
The flexural modulus of elasticity of the precast concrete at final, the precast concrete
at initial, and the topping concrete, respectively.
Ecc:
Eccentricity.
ecu:
Ultimate compressive strain of the concrete. Usually equal to 0.003 -in/in.
Effective Width of
Section:
The limiting effective width of a T-beam per Art. 8.10.
End Anchorage:
PRESTO recognizes three types of end anchorage for mild reinforcement: straight,
hooked and mechanical. Mechanical anchorage is defined in ACI 318-99 as any
mechanical device capable of developing the strength of the reinforcement without
damage to the concrete.
a
u
i
t
l
a
v
E
Eps:
n
o
y
p
o
Modulus of elasticity of the prestressing tendons.
Es:
Modulus of elasticity of the mild steel.
f'c, f'ci, f'ct:
The compressive strength of the precast concrete at final, of the precast concrete at
initial, and of the topping, respectively.
Field Length:
The maximum number of characters that can be input for a particular item of data.
File Extension:
A description of up to 3 characters that is separated from the file name by a period (.).
Useful for categorizing files. PRESTO reserves the file extensions .prt for data files,
and .txt for output files.
PRESTOv8.6 Glossary
/ A7-3
Appendix Seven
File Name:
Alphanumeric name of a disk file as allowed by the operating system. PRESTO allows
the use of long file names.
fpu:
Specified tensile strength of the prestressing tendons.
fpy:
Calculated yield strength of the prestressing tendons, taken as equal to 0.9fpu for low
relaxation strand and 0.85 for stress-relieved strand.
fy:
Specified yield strength of the mild reinforcement.
Gap:
PRESTO defines the gap as the boundary distance minus the width of the topping slab.
The gap may also be thought of as the region between the beams. See Slab.
Hard Disk:
Fixed disk.
Hours to Release:
Number of hours between tensioning and detensioning the strands. Used in prestress
loss computations.
Input Data File:
See data file.
Input Field:
Specific positions on the computer screen in which the program can accept input
(usually alphanumeric) from the user.
Input Screen:
A collection of related input fields which allow the user access to the current data file.
Invalid Entry:
Your input in the current field exceeds either the minimum or maximum limit for this
value. The allowable range for the current field (if any) is usually listed in the message
box that shows this error.
Jacking Ratio:
The initial jacking force of the strand expressed as a fraction of fpu (e.g. 0.70).
Kern Points:
The boundary points of a beam cross-section whereby strands placed within that region
will cause compression in both the top and bottom of the section: k1 = yb - St/A and ku
= yb - St/A.
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
Lambda:
n
o
y
p
o
Strand Added
Effect at bottom
Effect at top
Below kern pts.
Compression
Tension
Between kern pts.
Compression
Compression
Above kern pts.
Tension
Compression
As sand is replaced with lightweight fines in a concrete mix, the unit weight decreases
and the mix is usually referred to as sand-lightweight concrete. Lambda is defined in
ACI 318-99 to account for changed properties of such concrete.
Ld Multiplier:
See development length multiplier.
Lightweight
Concrete:
Concrete that contains lightweight aggregate and has a unit weight not exceeding 110
pcf (1800 kg/m).
Linearly Varying
Load:
Trapezoidal load defined by beginning and ending locations and beginning and ending
magnitudes.
A7-4 / Glossary
PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Seven
Live Load
Recapture:
Temporary increase of tensile stress in prestressed tendons due to superimposed live

load.
Load Classes:
PRESTO recognizes five load classes:
DL
dead load (non-composite)
SD
superimposed dead load (composite)
SDS
Superimposed dead load of snow (composite) in ACI 318-99
y
p
o
Lr/S/R External loads (composite) in ACI 318-05

LL
live load
SL
Sustained live load
Load Factors:
Dead and live load factors in accordance with

modified by the user.
Load Type:
PRESTO recognizes three types of loads:
n
o
CON
concentrated (point), kips or kN
UNI
uniform, ksf or kN/m2
LIN
linearly varying, klf or kN/m
ACI 318-99 Art. 9.2,
which may be
i
t
PRESTO supports three methods to calculate prestress losses. The first (PCI) follows
Loss Analysis:
the method presented in the PCI Design Handbook, 5th Edition. The second method
(Time-dependent) follows the time-dependent method described in the article
Recommendations for Estimating Prestress Losses, PCI Journal, Vol. 20, No. 4,
July-August 1975. The last method (Manual), allows the user to input losses directly as
a percentage of the initial prestressing force.
Magnitude:
a
u
The absolute value of a particular quantity.
l
a
Midspan Spacing:
The distance between c.g.s of adjacent strand levels at the depress point(s) (if any).
Modulus of
Elasticity:
Ratio of normal stress to the corresponding strain for tensile or compressive stresses.
The material property that determines the deformability under load.
v
E
Moment of Inertia:
Also known as the second moment of an area, it is defined as the product of the area of
an element and the square of the distance from the axis to that element.
Non-reinforced
Section Properties:
Computed section properties that include the effects of openings but not reinforcement.
Normal Weight
Concrete:
Concrete that has a unit weight equal to 150 pcf (2400 kg/m3) is generally referred to
as normal weight concrete.
Opening:
A void introduced into a hollow core slab or the flange of a flanged member. Openings
may be either rectangular or circular. PRESTO automatically recomputes the section
properties in zones where openings are present.
PRESTOv8.6 Glossary
/ A7-5
Appendix Seven
Output File:
A disk file in which PRESTO stores results from calculations. Output files are given
the extension .txt.
Overall Length:
The out-to-out dimension of the beam.
Partial Strands:
(also referred to as fractional strands) PRESTO allows the user to specify a decimal
value less than 1.0 for the number of strands in a location.
Radio Buttons:
A related group of input fields, only one of which may be selected at any one time.
This type of field derives its name from the old style car radio push buttons, when you
pushed one of the buttons down, all of the other buttons came up.
Rebar ID:
A unique identifier assigned by the user to differentiate between rebar types.
Rebar Library:
A disk file (REBAR.pr3) that contains user defined rebar type data.
Relative Humidity:
The average ambient relative humidity expressed as a percentage (e.g., 75%).
Results Display:
A display of the results of the calculations for a user requested analysis. This display
can be viewed on the screen, sent to the printer, or saved in a disk file (for later
printing).
Rho-calc:
For a flanged section, if the compression block is within the top flange, the width of the
top flange is used in this formula. PRESTO does not consider the width of the web or
distinguish between the web and flange.
S-req:
If just one bar is used, a warning message displays to notify the user that the program
does not consider horizontal spacing.
Sand Lightweight
Concrete:
Defined by PRESTO as concrete with a unit weight between 110 and 150 pcf (18002500 kg/m).
Section ID:
A unique identifier assigned by the user to differentiate between entries in the section
library.
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
Section Library:
A disk file (beams.pr1) in which section data may be stored by the user.
Section Type:
PRESTO recognizes ten different section types, including Double Tees, Single Tees,
Keystone Joists, Rectangular Beams, Inverted Tee Beams, L-Beams, Reversed Lbeam, Hollow Core, Solid Slabs, and I-Girders.
v
E
Self-Weight
Multipliers:
Multipliers of the self-weight at release and final conditions that allow the user to vary
the effective self-weight of the member. For example, a wall panel might have a selfweight multiplier of 1.0 at release when the panel is horizontal and a multiplier of 0.0
at final when it is vertical (i.e., self-weight is not causing flexure).
Shielding:
A method of reducing the effectiveness of a strand over a given portion of the beam.
PRESTO can model both exterior (end) and interior shielding.
Slab:
This is a term used by PRESTO for that portion of the topping that is directly on top of
the precast. The portion of the topping that is not over the precast is referred to as the
gap. See gap.
A7-6 / Glossary
PRESTO v8.6
Appendix Seven
Span Location:
The span location in can be either Exterior of Interior. PRESTO uses the span location
to determine the maximum overhang width for sections with top flanges and topped
sections in accordance with ACI 318-99, Sections 8.10.2 and 8.10.3.
Stem Mesh:
Structural welded wire reinforcement. PRESTO only considers the vertical

component of this reinforcement for vertical shear calcuations.
Strand Grouping:
PRESTO groups the strand pattern into groups of 1 or 2 strands from the top level of
the pattern a pair at a time until all strands have been removed from that level. If there
are an odd number of strands at that level then the last group will consist of 1 strand.
Strands are removed from successive levels until the pattern has been exhausted.
Strand ID:
A unique identifier assigned by the user to differentiate between strand types.
Strand Initial Pull:
See jacking ratio.
Strand Library:
A disk file (strand.pr2) that contains user-defined strand type data.
Strand Type:
Strand may be either low-relaxation or stress-relieved. Both types of strands must

conform to ASTM A416.
Support Locations:
Support locations measured in from the ends of the beam, which may be different at
release and at final conditions.
Topping:
Topping is that portion of the section, which combined with the precast section, makes
up the composite section. Topping may be split into the slab (that portion directly on
top of the precast) and the gap (boundary width minus the width of the slab).
Uniform Load:
A load that is measured in weight/area.
Unit Weight:
A measure of the density of a material, expressed in weight per volume.
Units of
Measurement:
measures.
n
o
y
p
o
i
t
a
u
PRESTO supports both the ft-lbs system and the metric system of weights and
l
a
Volume to Surface
Ratio:
Usually approximated by the ratio of the area of a section to its perimeter.
Web-extent:
The distance between the tops of the exterior stems of a member. If a member has only
one stem then the web-extent is the stem width at the top. Used in computing the
effective width.
v
E
Zone:
A prismatic zone along the member in which the section properties are the same.
PRESTO automatically creates as many zones as necessary depending on how many
openings and changes in topping are introduced.
PRESTOv8.6 Glossary
/ A7-7
Appendix Seven
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
A7-8 / Glossary
PRESTO v8.6
I N D E X
Index
Symbols
# of steel A1-7
Ash, min A1-6
A
A A1-5, A1-6
Bo GO-6
Authorization GS-8
Bot wid A1-2
Accelerated A1-5
Ace A1-4
Acp GO-7
Acr A1-6
Add
New circle GO-65
Authorization tab GS-13
Distance in section properties GO-4
AUTOCAD DXF format GO-16

Auto-debond
Percentage GO-8
Width TH-3
Bt A1-4
Av+2At A1-7
Bw A1-4, A1-7
AvC A1-7
Bweb A1-6
Average depth TH-16
New polygon GO-65

Nodes GO-65
Ayh, min A1-9
Ahr A1-8
i
t
B
b1 A7-1
Ahs A1-9
Al A1-7
Allowable
Reinforcement ratio, maximum A1-
Balanced reinforcement ratio A1-7

Bar size A7-1
Reinforcement ratio, minimum A17
Stress tab GO-25

Stresses A7-1
l
a
Alphanumeric A7-1
An A1-6
Analysis TH-2, TH-6
v
E
Aps A1-1
Area
Assumed crack plane A1-6
Basic features TH-1

Beam
Length GO-3
a
u
Sections library GO-63
Type GO-3
Bearing
Analysis GO-18, TH-27
Length GO-27
Steel A1-6
Steel data A1-4
Steel Info dialog box GO-26
Width GO-27
Beff GO-27, TH-4, A1-4
Beta-1 A7-1
Composite section A1-1
P/c A1-4
Compression Steel A1-1
Tpg A1-4
Mild Tension A1-1
Beta1 A1-6
Non-composite section A1-1

Non-composite transformed section A1-5
Bf A1-4
Prestressing Strand A1-1
Bfl-top A1-2, A7-1
As, As A1-1
Bv A1-4, A1-9
n
o
Avf A1-6
Advanced features TH-2
y
p
o
Boundaries left/right GO-4

Boundary
Distance TH-3, A7-1
Warnings GS-2
About PRESTO GO-72
Tab GO-12
AtC A1-7
Transfer GS-11
A1, A2 A1-6
Aoh GO-7, A1-2
Analysis GO-19
Demo GS-10
A, Ac A1-1
Locations A7-1
Bilinear A7-1
Asterisk A7-1
C
C A1-5
c/dt TH-18, A1-6, A7-2

Calculated
Internal constants A1-4
Longitudinal steel A1-7
Reinforcement ratio A1-7

Calculations
Camber and deflections TH-22
Cracking moment TH-17
Cracking ratio TH-2
Development length TH-25
Gap TH-3
Over-reinforcement TH-17
Section properties TH-4
Ultimate strength TH-2
Camber and deflections TH-22, A1-9
Multipliers A7-2
Cc A1-7
Check points TH-6
Dialog box GO-15
Properties A7-2
Circular
Openings TH-2
Section dialog box GO-67
Bfl A1-6
Class GO-12, A1-1, A7-2
Bfl-bot A1-2, A7-1
Clearance GO-7
Bg A1-4
Comp A1-1
Composite A1-1
PRESTOv8.6
Index / 1
D
D A1-8
Dfps A1-7
Compression A1-1
D, d A1-7
Diagrams GO-61
Compression controlled TH-18

Compressive strength
Precast concrete at final A1-1
Data file A7-2
Dialog box A7-3
List A7-2
Days
To Comp DL GO-21, A1-3, A7-2
Diameter A1-1
Shear depth GO-19

Snow load GO-12, TH-7
Precast concrete at release A1-1

Topping concrete A1-1
To topping GO-21, A1-3, A7-2

Dead load GO-12, A1-1, A7-2, A7-3
Concentrated loads GO-11
Dead, non-composite load TH-7

Debonding
Increment GO-8
Concrete stress distribution TH-12

Contents GO-72
Context-sensitive help IN-6, A7-2
DebondingSee Shielding A7-3

Default
Directory A7-3
Control A1-7
Controls A1-6
Convert libraries GO-71
File name A7-3
Cor A1-7
Value A7-3
CR A1-5
Multiplier tab GO-22

Delete nodes GO-66
Depress A1-3
Point A1-3, A7-3
ACI 318-95 TH-11
l
a
Sections TH-9
v
E
Depressed strand patterns TH-2

Depth
Of compression block A1-6
a
u
ACI 318-99 TH-10
Section properties A7-2
i
t
Demo authorization GS-10
Depth A1-5, A7-2

Crack Control
ACI 318-02 TH-10
CSA 23.3-94 TH-11

Cracked
Beam TH-9
n
o
Deflection TH-23
Cr A1-6
Crack
Control A1-7, A7-2
Slab TH-9
Cracking
Load A1-7
Multiplier A7-3
To neutral axis A1-6

To neutral axis, maximum A1-7
Description GO-12
Design
Bearing strength A1-6
Methodology, ACI 318-02 TH-18
Methodology, ACI 318-99 TH-16
Load prestressed members TH-17
Options tab GO-17
Moment GO-20, TH-17
Parameters dialog box GO-17
Crash GS-14
Create pattern
Assuming GO-20
Creep A1-5
Critical
Point TH-6
Ratio TH-16
Current data file A7-2
Results screen GO-46

Status screen GO-46
Tab GO-16
Detailed losses GO-20
Developed
Bonded GO-25
Debonded GO-25
Development length TH-25, A1-3,
A7-3
y
p
o
Dimensions option GO-64

Direct transfer GS-11
On a network GS-13
Direct Transfer tab GS-11, GS-13

Dist to Brg A1-4
Distance to CL of bearing GO-27

Drawing
Option GO-64
Print dialog box GO-47
Properties dialog box GO-66

Properties settings GO-65
The beam section GO-65
Dsc A1-7
Dt A1-7
E
Ec A1-1, A7-3
Ecc GO-12, A1-1, A7-3
Eccentricity GO-4, A1-1
Eci A1-1, A7-3
Ect A1-1, A7-3
Ecu A1-2, A7-3
ecu GO-10
Effective
Moment of inertia TH-23
Shear friction coefficient A1-6

Width of section A7-3
Elastic shortening A1-5
Elasticity GO-9
Final GO-10
Release GO-9
Topping GO-10
End
Anchorage A7-3
Rotations GO-19
Eps A1-1, A7-3
Equilibrium of forces TH-12, TH-13
Es A1-3, A7-3
Exit GO-58
2 /
PRESTO v8.6
Exposure A1-2
Fpu A1-1, A7-4
I, Ic A1-1
External load on composite TH-7
Fpy A1-1, A7-4
Ice A1-5
Fr A1-7
Icr A1-9
Front View GO-60
Ie A1-9
Fs GO-11, A1-3, A1-7
Ig A1-9
Fse A1-7
Ig/Ie A1-9
Fst A1-5
Image GO-59
F
Fc A1-1, A7-3
Fci A1-1, A7-3
Fci-min A1-6
Fct A1-1, A7-3
Fy GO-10, A1-1, A7-4
F1, F2 GO-6
F-Act A1-8
Factored
Moment A1-2
In transition TH-18
G
Gap GO-4, TH-2, A1-3, A7-4
Shear A1-2
Topping adjustment GO-5

General
Operation GO-1
Torsion A1-2
F-alw A1-8
Fcds A1-5
Overview TH-1
Fcir A1-5
Getting started GS-1
Fcr A1-5
Gross moment of inertia TH-24
Fct GO-10, A1-1
H
H, Hc A1-1
Field length A7-3

File
Extension A7-3
File menu GO-54, GO-55
a
u
Hard disk A7-4
Exit GO-58
New GO-54
Open GO-54
Print GO-56
l
a
Print setup GO-57

Save GO-55
Save as GO-55
Save setting GO-55
v
E
Security GO-58
Fillet GO-66
Final
Stresses A1-6
Supports GO-4
Fixed license GS-13

Flange opening GO-5, TH-2
Floating license GS-13
Floppy disk transfer GS-12
Fpc A1-8
Fpi A1-5
i
t
A2-1, A3-1, A4-1, A5-1,

A6-1, A7-1
Initial Jacking Co-efficient GO-8

Input
Data fileSee Data file A7-4
Field A7-4
Screen A7-4
Installation GS-3
Introduction IN-1
n
o
Hand calculations for selected items
Name A7-4
y
p
o
Button summaries GO-59
Shear GO-11
Invalid entry A7-4

J
J A1-5
Jacking ratio A7-4

K
Kcir A1-5
Kcr A1-5
Hardware requirements GS-1

Height
Precast section A1-2
Kern points A7-4
Help desk GS-15
Ksh A1-5
Kes A1-5
Kre A1-5
Help menu GO-72

Contents GO-72
L
L1, L2 A1-3
How to use help GO-72
Lambda A7-4
About PRESTO GO-72
Search for help on GO-72

Visit LEAP Web site GO-72
Hollow core sections TH-4
Horizontal
Clearance GO-7
Shear GO-19, A1-8
Hours to release GO-21, A1-3, A7-4
How to use help GO-72
I
I A1-5
p/c A1-4
tpg A1-4
Layout TH-2
L-c, R-c A1-3
Ld multiplier See Development length
multiplier A7-4
LEAP Software
Sales department GS-1
Security GS-9
Technical support GS-15
Length GO-5, A1-2, A1-4
Fps A1-7
PRESTOv8.6
Index / 3
M
M.I. A1-2
Non-composite transformed section A1-5
Beam sections GO-63
Ma A1-9
Precast section A1-2
Convert from v. 7 GO-71
Mag GO-12
Prestressing tendon GO-69
Magnitude A7-5
Mor A1-7
Rebar GO-70
Manual TH-6
Ms A1-5
Setup GO-63
Materials tab GO-8

Maximum
Auto-debonding percentage GO-8
Msc A1-7
Mbm A1-5
Mu-eff A1-6
Mc0 A1-9
Multiple file copies GS-14
Multipliers A1-3
Libraries menu GO-62
License GS-1
Fixed GS-13
Floating GS-13
Loss of GS-14
Site GS-1
Linear loads GO-11
Linearly varying load A7-4
Live load GO-12, TH-7, A1-1
Classes A7-5
Composite external TH-7
Factors dialog box GO-13

Live TH-6, TH-7
l
a
v
E
Loads tab GO-11
Location A1-1, A1-2
Longitudinal Bars Screen Terms GO40
Longitudinal Bars Tab dialog box GO39
Loss
Analysis A7-5
L-t, R-t A1-3
Non-reinforced section properties A7-
n
o
i
t
Show GO-59
a
u
Factors TH-8, A7-5
Loc GO-12
Md0 A1-9
Libraries GO-62
Dead, non-composite TH-7
Type A7-5
New GO-54
Help GO-72
Composite snow TH-7
Topping TH-7
Md A1-8
Member Info tab GO-3

Menus
File GO-54, GO-55
Load TH-3
Sustained live TH-8
Mcr A1-2
Measurement units IN-5, A7-7
Lo GO-6
Superimposed dead TH-7
Mu A1-2
N
Network setup GS-2
MCF A1-5
Mdl A1-5
Recapture GO-20, A7-5
Stages TH-24
y
p
o
Mtopg A1-5
Mcdl A1-5
Lightweight concrete TH-26, A7-4
Self-weight TH-7
Section A1-1
Mid Debond GO-38

Midspan
Spacing A7-5
Miscellaneous Data tab GO-23

Mll A1-5
C
5
Normal weight concrete A7-5

Nu/Vu GO-27, A1-4
O
Open GO-54
Opening TH-2, TH-3, A7-5
Data dialog box GO-6
Type GO-6
Output file A7-6
Overall length A7-6
Over-reinforcement TH-17
Mmax A1-8
P
Pan GO-59, GO-66
Model GO-60
Pcp GO-7
Modify nodes GO-66
PCR A1-5
Modulus of elasticity TH-12, TH-13,
P-eff A1-8
A1-3, A7-5
Ph GO-7, A1-2
Precast concrete at final A1-1
Phi Factors tab GO-23
Precast concrete at release A1-1
Phi*Mn A1-7
Prestressing strand A1-1
Phi*Mn/Mcr A1-7
Topping concrete A1-1
PhiMn/Mu A1-7
Modulus of rupture TH-23, A1-7
PhiVn A1-6
Moment of inertia TH-25, A7-5
Pi A1-6
Cracked A1-9
PMn A1-7
Effective A1-9
Precast A1-2
Precast section
Modeled TH-2
Gross A1-9
4 /
PRESTO v8.6
Properties TH-4
Preferences GO-62
Prestress
And Losses tab GO-20
Losses TH-5
Prestressed
Strand data A1-3
Load TH-7
Set up libraries GO-63
Release supports GO-4
Setup Type GS-6

Shear
ACI 318-02 TH-19
CSA 23.3-94 TH-21
Reset GO-60
Shear wid A1-2
Results GO-60
Shielding A7-6
Display A7-6
Tendon library GO-69
Show menu GO-59
Return and update GO-65
Print GO-56, GO-60

Setup GO-57
Program
Authorization GS-8
Crash GS-14
Diagrams GO-61
Rho-bal A1-7
Image GO-59
Rho-calc A1-7, A7-6
Model GO-60
Rho-max A1-7
Preferences GO-62
Security GS-1
Project
Data A1-2
n
o
Roof live/snow/rain load GO-12
Shrinkage A1-6
Rotate GO-59
Site license GS-1
i
t
S
S A1-6
Tab GO-2
Provided A1-6
Pull fraction A1-3
l
a
Rebar TH-2
v
E
Library GO-70, A7-6

Pattern data A1-3
Properties A4-2
Reduction
Coefficient A1-6
Factors TH-26
Register Transfer tab GS-12

Reinforcement ratio
Balanced A1-7
Source directory GS-11

Spacing A1-3
Span location GO-4, A7-7
Setting GO-55
RE A1-6
S-max A1-8
Save GO-55
As GO-55
Radio buttons A7-6
Slab TH-2, A7-6
Sand lightweight concrete A7-6
a
u
PSH A1-6
Results GO-60
Show vertex GO-66
Rho-w A1-8
Menu commands GO-54
RH A1-2
Rho-min A1-7
Installation GS-3
y
p
o
ACI 318-99 TH-19
Spacing of reinforcement A1-7
Tendon ID GO-8
R
R1, R2 A1-3
Multipliers A7-6
Release stresses A1-6
Required A1-6
Prestressing A1-9
Calculated A1-7
Minimum allowable A1-7
Release/final GO-21
Strand pattern data A1-3
ID A7-6
Self-weight TH-2
Relative humidity GO-21, A1-2, A7-6
Loss computations A1-5
Data A1-3
Maximum allowable A1-7
Sb, Sbc A1-2

Sbce A1-5
SCF A1-6
Search for help on GO-72

Section
Detail dialog box GO-64, GO-65
Splash screen GO-1

Splitting tensile strength
Lightweight aggregate concrete
A1-1
S-prov TH-11, A1-7, A7-2

S-req TH-11, A1-7, A7-2, A7-6
SSF A1-6
Starting the program GO-1
Drawing screen GO-65
Steel Fy GO-27
ID GO-4, A7-6
Stems A1-2
Library GO-63, A7-6
Strand GO-30, A1-3
Properties TH-4
Grouping A7-7
Type A7-6
Groups A1-3
Types and Dimensions A5-1

Section drawing screen
Control Buttons GO-65
ID A7-7
Security GS-1
Pull data A1-3
Security protection GO-58
Shielding A1-3
Initial pullSee Jacking ratio A7-7

Properties A4-1
PRESTOv8.6
Index / 5
Stress/strain model GO-22
Tension A1-2
Tutorial Session T-1
Type A7-7
Tension controlled TH-18
Type GO-11
TensSide A1-5
Types of shoring GO-24
Strand and Rebar Pattern dialog box

GO-29
Strand library A7-7

Strand Tab GO-30
TensWid TH-11, A1-7
Elevated GO-24
Tfl A1-7
None GO-24
Tfl-bot A1-2
Strand Tab Screen Terms GO-34

Strength GO-9
Typographical conventions IN-2
Theory TH-1
Final GO-9
Theta A1-2
Release GO-9
Theta Min/Max/Inc GO-27
Topping GO-9
Thickness GO-5
Stress Factors dialog box GO-28

Stresses
ACI 318-02 TH-8
Thickness of compression flange A1-7

Time-dependent method TH-5
Tlim A1-8
ACI 318-99 TH-8
Top wid A1-2
CSA 23.3-94 TH-10
Topping TH-2, TH-5, A1-2, A1-3,
Stress-strain curve TH-14
n
o
A7-7
Structural analysis A1-5

Superimposed dead load GO-12, TH7, A1-2
Data A1-3
Effective Width GO-25
i
t
Elasticity GO-10
Of snow A1-2
Gap width GO-5
Supp-L/R A1-5
Load TH-7
Support locations A7-7
Slab width GO-5
Sustained live load GO-12, TH-8,
a
u
A1-2
SWfin A1-5
Strength GO-9
Unit weight GO-9

Weight TH-2
SWrel A1-5
System Information GS-3, GS-4
l
a
System requirements GS-1
T
T1, t A1-6
tab
Direct Transfer GS-11, GS-13
v
E
Torsion TH-20, A1-7
Factors GO-14
Strength A1-6
Tensile strength, prestressing
strand A1-1
Ultimate Strength
ACI 318-02 TH-11
ACI 318-99 TH-11
CSA 23.3-94 TH-12
Uncracked sections TH-9
Unfactored
Moment A1-5
Shear A1-5
Uniform
Load A7-7
Loads GO-11
Unit weight A1-2, A7-7
Release/final GO-9
ACI 318-99 TH-20
Topping GO-9
CSA 23.3-94 TH-21
Parameters dialog box GO-7

Transfer
Bonded GO-24
Debonded GO-25
Transfer In GS-13
Length A1-4
Transfer Out GS-13
U
UCR A1-6
Ultimate
Concrete compressive strain A1-2
ACI 318-02 TH-20
Register Transfer GS-12
Transfer authorization GS-11
TB2 file GS-14
Transfer In tab GS-13
Technical support GS-15

Tekla Structures
using within PRESTO GO-48
Template
Auto generation dialog box GO-68
Transfer Out tab GS-13
Dialog box GO-68
y
p
o
Touch GO-24
Tfl-top A1-2
Transform strand GO-18

Transition sections TH-9
Tributary Width A1-2
Tt A1-4
Tu A1-2
Units IN-5, A7-7

Unreinforced section property zone
data A1-4
Use Manual Input Cr value GO-27
User input option GO-64
User location
For cracking moment GO-20
For detailed losses GO-20
User-Defined Effective Width of Topping dialog box GO-27
User-defined method TH-6
USH A1-6
Using
Online help IN-6
User manual IN-1
6 /
PRESTO v8.6
Vu A1-2, A1-6
V
Vci A1-8
Y
Yb, Ybc A1-2
Vu-max A1-6
Vcw A1-8
Ybce A1-5
W
W A1-6
Vd A1-8
Vertical
Clearance GO-7
Y-cg A1-3
Ycrit A1-8
Yield strength
Mild steel A1-1
Wc A1-2
Shear TH-19, TH-20, A1-7
Wct A1-2
Vi A1-8
Web-extent TH-4, A1-2, A7-7
Visit LEAP Web site GO-72
Weight A1-2
Vnh A1-9
Welcome GS-3
Volume to surface ratio A1-2, A1-6,
Z
Zone A1-2, A7-7
Whitney stress block TH-11
A7-7
Zoom-In GO-59, GO-66
Width A1-4
Volume/surface area ratio GO-64
Zoom-Out GO-59, GO-66
Wt A1-2
Vp A1-8
www.leapsoft.com GO-72
Vs A1-5, A1-8
y
p
o
Prestressing strand A1-1
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
PRESTOv8.6
Index / 7
y
p
o
n
o
i
t
a
u
l
a
v
E
8 /
PRESTO v8.6

Presto User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Presto User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

y

Precast & Prestressed

PRESTO LEAP Software, Inc.

Tekla Structures is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation.

LEAP Software, Inc.

Sri Kanneganti (Product Manager)

CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................. GS-1

MULTIPLE FILE COPIES ............................................................................................................................................... GS-14

CHAPTER 3 GENERAL OPERATION ...........................................................................................GO-1

OPENING DATA DIALOG BOX .........................................................................................................................................GO-6

MATERIALS TAB ............................................................................................................................................................GO-8

USER-DEFINED EFFECTIVE WIDTH OF TOPPING DIALOG BOX .......................................................................................GO-27

DESIGN RESULTS SCREEN ..........................................................................................................................................GO-46

CHAPTER 4 TUTORIAL SESSION ................................................................................................... T-1

TUTORIAL SESSION DESIGN OF A 8DT24 DOUBLE TEE ............................................................ T-3

CHAPTER 5 THEORY ................................................................................................................... TH-1

Table of Contents / iii

GENERAL OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................................................... TH-1

CHAPTER 1 NOMENCLATURE AND PRINTOUT EXPLANATION .............................................. A1-1

CRACK CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................................... A1-7

CHAPTER 2 HAND CALCULATIONS FOR SELECTED ITEMS....................................................A2-1

CHAPTER 3 HAND CALCULATIONS FOR TORSION ..................................................................A3-1

TORSION DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................................A3-5

CHAPTER 4 STRAND AND REBAR PROPERTIES ...................................................................... A4-1

CHAPTER 7 GLOSSARY................................................................................................................ A7-1

PRESTO Online Help Screen ...................................................................................................................IN-6

LEAP Software Security Screen Direct Transfer Tab....................................GS-11

FIGURE GO-1. PRESTO Splash Screen .........................................................................................................................GO-1

FIGURE GO-28. Stress Factors Dialog Box (CSA 23.3-94)...........................................................................................GO-29

FIGURE GO-71. Section Detail Dialog Box (Double Tee) ................................................................................................GO-64

Shear and Torsion Design of an L Beam on 30 Ft. Span .........................................................................A3-1

PRESTO is a comprehensive computer program for the design and analysis of

precast, prestressed concrete beams in accordance with ACI specifications.

Using the Manual

PRESTO user manual. It is advised when trying to find a

Using the Manual

The best way to become acquainted with the program is by

We have tried to make PRESTO as user-friendly as possible;

Option and Icon References

Pull-down menus, Drop-down lists, Lists, Check

Beam ID drop-down list

Screens, Dialog Boxes, Tabs, Libraries

System Information screen

ACI Art. 9.20.2.4

Note: Unless stated otherwise, references to Art. refer to an article number of

CSA 23.3-94 (with updates of 2001)

Ability to design simple-spans with unequal cantilevers.

Ability to place rectangular or circular flange openings anywhere along the

Differentiate topping width over members and between members separately.

Vary topping thickness along members.

Ability to place dead loads on composite or non-composite sections.

Ability to place rebar in topping or in precast.

Designate straight, hooked, or mechanically anchored ends on rebar.

Specify stirrup reinforcement

Specify stem mesh reinforcement

Easy-to-use graphical strand pattern input screen.

Ability to select regular, stress-relieved, or low-relaxation strands.

Ability to shield (debond) straight patterns.

Automatic strand pattern generation.

Automatic shielding of strands.

Specify fractional strands

Strand Pattern Options

Graphical input for sections using the Drawing Editor.